23.10.2014 Views

module 5 planning of the english language teaching-learning process

module 5 planning of the english language teaching-learning process

module 5 planning of the english language teaching-learning process

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

YUMPU automatically turns print PDFs into web optimized ePapers that Google loves.

UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE<br />

LOJA<br />

AREA DE LA EDUCACIÓN EL ARTE Y LA<br />

COMUNICACIÓN<br />

ENGLISH LANGUAGE CAREER<br />

MODULE 5<br />

PLANNING OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE<br />

TEACHING-LEARNING PROCESS<br />

MODULE COORDINATOR:<br />

Mg.Sc. Paola Moreno O.<br />

Lic. Sandra J. Ochoa de Maldonado.<br />

WORKSHOPS:<br />

Syntactic Analysis <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English Language by<br />

Verónica Richtarcikova<br />

Practice <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English Native Speech by<br />

Renata Boguckaite<br />

ACADEMIC YEAR: SEPTEMBER 2010- FEBRUARY 2011<br />

LOJA-ECUADOR


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

A. PRESENTATION<br />

MODULE 5 PLANNING OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE TEACHING LEARNING<br />

PROCESS, Component <strong>of</strong> long tern <strong>planning</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English <strong>language</strong> career, has as<br />

aims and objectives <strong>of</strong> developing in which methods, techniques as methodological<br />

strategies must be applied during <strong>the</strong> <strong>teaching</strong>-<strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong>. It focused on <strong>the</strong><br />

training based on a <strong>the</strong>oretical, research and practical outline, which will be used as a<br />

foundation to suggest new ideas in order to face, change and improve <strong>the</strong> problem<br />

statement <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir pr<strong>of</strong>essional practice.<br />

It <strong>of</strong>fers a specialized training based on a <strong>the</strong>oretical, practical and research frame, <strong>the</strong><br />

same that will be used as a base to bring closer to <strong>the</strong> reality and propose alternatives<br />

<strong>of</strong> bettering <strong>the</strong> problem statement <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir pr<strong>of</strong>essional practice.<br />

The <strong>module</strong> in its programming includes <strong>process</strong>es <strong>of</strong> study and research. The<br />

formative <strong>process</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> <strong>module</strong> implies <strong>the</strong> development <strong>of</strong> three stages:<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

The first stage.<br />

Identification <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> problem statement about Planning <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English Language<br />

Teaching-Learning Process, in <strong>the</strong> different educational establishments <strong>of</strong> Loja<br />

city.<br />

The second stage.<br />

Critical Analysis on Planning <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English Language and contrasting <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

<strong>the</strong>oretical frame to <strong>the</strong> reality observed.<br />

The third stage.<br />

Definition and alternatives <strong>of</strong> solution about Planning, which may contribute to<br />

<strong>the</strong> improvement <strong>of</strong> pr<strong>of</strong>essional practice.<br />

With <strong>the</strong> development <strong>of</strong> each one <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> stages and its activities, <strong>the</strong> students will be<br />

able to analyze and interpret in a critical way <strong>the</strong> tangible reality and propose<br />

alternatives <strong>of</strong> improvement <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> problem statement researched.<br />

B. PROBLEM DESCRIPTION<br />

Planning stage about <strong>the</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> <strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong> is an important task that <strong>the</strong><br />

teachers <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English Language carry out daily, so that it is essential that <strong>the</strong>y master<br />

it, since it is not being used appropriately, due to some problems that <strong>the</strong> pr<strong>of</strong>essionals<br />

<strong>of</strong> this specialization face, like:<br />

The lack <strong>of</strong> management <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson <strong>planning</strong> designing hinders <strong>the</strong> development <strong>of</strong><br />

Planning <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong>-<strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong> Páge 2


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

interactive classes in order to keep students motivated and <strong>the</strong>refore gets behind <strong>the</strong><br />

improvement <strong>of</strong> four basic linguistic skills <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English <strong>language</strong>, and as a limited<br />

result, it influences in <strong>the</strong> methodology that <strong>the</strong> teachers may<br />

apply in <strong>the</strong>ir classes, considering <strong>the</strong> textbook as <strong>the</strong> single instrument to teach.<br />

The <strong>planning</strong> stage is bounded up with methodology, and some English teachers lack<br />

<strong>of</strong> upgraded methodological knowledge, that´s why <strong>the</strong>y keep applying <strong>the</strong> traditional<br />

method, in which <strong>the</strong> teacher is <strong>the</strong> unique active person in <strong>the</strong> classroom, and<br />

students become in just listeners during <strong>the</strong> whole <strong>process</strong>, this noninvolvement <strong>of</strong><br />

students holds down <strong>the</strong> <strong>teaching</strong>-<strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong>.<br />

C. TRANSFORMATION OBJECT<br />

The <strong>planning</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> <strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English <strong>language</strong> in <strong>the</strong><br />

educational establishments, in most cases is done in a conventional way, this situation<br />

is caused by <strong>the</strong> lack <strong>of</strong> knowledge that teachers have in related aspects with <strong>the</strong><br />

<strong>planning</strong> <strong>of</strong> practice, by <strong>the</strong> ignorance <strong>of</strong> elements <strong>of</strong> macro, meso and micro<br />

<strong>planning</strong>. The traditional system has promoted in <strong>the</strong> students <strong>the</strong> dismotivation and<br />

insufficient <strong>learning</strong> in <strong>the</strong> development <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> four basic linguistics skills. Therefore <strong>the</strong><br />

future teachers <strong>of</strong> English have to dispose <strong>of</strong> knowledge about <strong>planning</strong> in <strong>the</strong> <strong>teaching</strong><br />

<strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong> to guide and organize <strong>the</strong> <strong>learning</strong> group work and have a technical<br />

and conceptual mastery about English <strong>language</strong>.<br />

D. OBJECTIVES<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

To analyze <strong>the</strong> macro, meso and micro <strong>planning</strong><br />

To distinguish <strong>the</strong> problem statement <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> <strong>planning</strong> in <strong>the</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> <strong>learning</strong><br />

<strong>process</strong>.<br />

To contrast <strong>the</strong> obtained information with <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>oretical frame.<br />

To establish alternatives to improve <strong>the</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> <strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

English <strong>language</strong>.<br />

E. PROFESSIONAL PRACTICE<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

Use <strong>the</strong> English <strong>language</strong> to communicate inside and outside <strong>the</strong> classroom<br />

Communicate with native speakers about various <strong>the</strong>mes.<br />

Express personal points <strong>of</strong> view as well as feeling by writing.<br />

Design meso and micro <strong>planning</strong> formats by including methodologies,<br />

strategies and techniques to achieve objectives.<br />

Elaborate didactic material<br />

Planning <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong>-<strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong> Páge 3


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

F. PROFESSIONAL PROFILE<br />

Students will be able to understand and comprehend <strong>the</strong> importance <strong>of</strong><br />

<strong>planning</strong> as <strong>the</strong> procedure <strong>of</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> by managing <strong>the</strong> literature as well as <strong>the</strong><br />

use <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> to communicate and interact. Moreover students will be<br />

aware <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> need to face real problems about it and get involved with <strong>the</strong> need<br />

<strong>of</strong> improvement through <strong>the</strong>ir contribution.<br />

G. RESEARCH PROCESS DESCRIPTION<br />

The research <strong>process</strong> will be done through three stages:<br />

Stage 1<br />

Identification <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> problem statement related to <strong>the</strong> English Language <strong>planning</strong> in <strong>the</strong><br />

different educational establishments <strong>of</strong> Loja city.<br />

Stage 2<br />

Critical analysis <strong>of</strong> <strong>planning</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English <strong>language</strong> and contrasting to <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>oretical<br />

frame to <strong>the</strong> reality observed.<br />

Stage 3<br />

Writing about <strong>the</strong> alternatives <strong>of</strong> solution about <strong>planning</strong> which may contribute to <strong>the</strong><br />

improvement <strong>of</strong> pr<strong>of</strong>essional practice.<br />

H. THEORETICAL FRAME<br />

CONTENTS: FIRST STAGE<br />

Interesting lives ( respect, self-stem)<br />

Personal tastes ( honesty, liberty)<br />

World cultures ( solidarity, tolerance)<br />

Socializing ( tolerance, liberty)<br />

Código de la Niñez y adolescencia<br />

Planning<br />

Elements <strong>of</strong> <strong>planning</strong><br />

Planning and preparing a lesson or sequence <strong>of</strong> lessons<br />

Identifying and selecting aims<br />

Identifying <strong>the</strong> different components a lesson<br />

Presentation techniques and introductory activities<br />

Practice activities and task for <strong>language</strong> and skills development<br />

Choosing assessment activities<br />

Planning <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong>-<strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong> Páge 4


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

CONTENTS: SECOND STAGE<br />

Law and order ( justice, respect, honesty)<br />

Strange Events ( sincerity, solidarity)<br />

Problem Solving ( punctuality, responsibility, solidarity)<br />

Behavior ( respect, sincerity)<br />

Selection and use <strong>of</strong> resources and materials<br />

Selection and use <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> course book materials<br />

Selection and use <strong>of</strong> supplementary materials and activities<br />

Selection and use <strong>of</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> aids<br />

Managing <strong>the</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> and <strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong><br />

Identifying <strong>the</strong> functions <strong>of</strong> learner’s <strong>language</strong><br />

Categorizing learners' mistakes<br />

CONTENTS: THIRD STAGE<br />

Material World ( humility, honesty, responsibility)<br />

Fame ( responsibility, punctuality)<br />

Trends ( respect, responsibility)<br />

Careers ( liberty, justice)<br />

Classroom management.<br />

Teacher roles<br />

Grouping learners<br />

Correcting learns<br />

Giving feedback<br />

Elaboration <strong>of</strong> Didactic material<br />

I. TEACHING ASSISTANCE AND ACTIVITES RELATING WITH THE<br />

COMMUNITY<br />

In order to contribute with <strong>the</strong> community, students will do internship in some<br />

schools outskirts <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> city. Students are going to work in <strong>the</strong> unit and lesson<br />

<strong>planning</strong> and carry <strong>the</strong>m out during it. Moreover <strong>the</strong>y will be in charge <strong>of</strong><br />

pr<strong>of</strong>essional improvement workshops which will train teachers from those<br />

schools to manage better <strong>the</strong>ir pr<strong>of</strong>essional styles.<br />

J. METHODOLOGY<br />

The methodology will be developed through:<br />

<br />

<br />

Academic work guide for each stage <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> <strong>module</strong>.<br />

The work will be orientated towards individual and group reading <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

<strong>the</strong>oretical, methodological and technological bases selected for <strong>the</strong> <strong>module</strong>,<br />

that permit <strong>the</strong> interactive participation and interpret, understand, explain and<br />

evaluate research, requiring for that analyze, syn<strong>the</strong>size, and elaborate graphic<br />

organizers that contribute to socialize <strong>the</strong> content, to elaborate accrediting<br />

products and sustain works in each stage.<br />

Planning <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong>-<strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong> Páge 5


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

The development <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> research <strong>process</strong> by means <strong>of</strong> a permanent tutoring <strong>of</strong><br />

<strong>the</strong> coordinator <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> <strong>module</strong>.<br />

To improve <strong>the</strong>ir level <strong>of</strong> <strong>learning</strong>, <strong>the</strong> students will use information on <strong>the</strong><br />

internet, laboratory practice and practice with native speakers.<br />

The workshops and seminaries will have a didactic instrumentation for <strong>the</strong><br />

integration and interdisciplinary work. Meaningful <strong>learning</strong>, <strong>learning</strong> strategies<br />

and <strong>the</strong> practice <strong>of</strong> values will be emphasized.<br />

The activities <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> <strong>module</strong> will be carried out in present modality, from Monday<br />

through Friday from 16:00 to 21:00 hours.<br />

Stage 1<br />

For Identify <strong>the</strong> problem statement related to <strong>the</strong> English Language <strong>planning</strong> in <strong>the</strong><br />

different educational establishments <strong>of</strong> Loja city, <strong>the</strong> following activities will be carried<br />

out:<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

Stage 2<br />

Study and revision <strong>of</strong> basic bibliography<br />

Application <strong>of</strong> a survey to determine <strong>the</strong> way <strong>of</strong> <strong>planning</strong>, executing and<br />

evaluating <strong>the</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> and <strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English <strong>language</strong> in<br />

secondary level establishment<br />

Individual and group work<br />

Individual and group exposition<br />

Plenary<br />

For Critical analysis <strong>of</strong> <strong>planning</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English <strong>language</strong> and contrasting to <strong>the</strong><br />

<strong>the</strong>oretical frame to <strong>the</strong> reality observed, <strong>the</strong> following activities will be carried out:<br />

Systematization <strong>of</strong> information<br />

Analysis and discussion <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> obtained results<br />

Application <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>oretical frame in <strong>the</strong> construction <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> comparison <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

obtained information<br />

Presentation and exposition <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> written reports<br />

Stage 3<br />

For Definition <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> alternatives <strong>of</strong> solution about <strong>planning</strong>, which may contribute to <strong>the</strong><br />

improvement <strong>of</strong> pr<strong>of</strong>essional practice, <strong>the</strong> following activities will be carried out:<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

Elaboration <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> proposal based on <strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>oretical frames studied and<br />

analyzed.<br />

Presentation and support <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> final report that contain <strong>the</strong> three moments.<br />

Analysis and discussion about <strong>the</strong> present work.<br />

k. TIMING AND CREDITS<br />

• First Stage<br />

From Sep 15th to Oct 29th<br />

160 Hours<br />

10 Credits<br />

Planning <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong>-<strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong> Páge 6


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

• Second Stage<br />

From Nov 3rd to Dec 17th<br />

160 Hours<br />

10 Credits<br />

• Third Stage<br />

Jan 3rd to Feb 11th 2011<br />

160 Hours<br />

10 Credits<br />

l. ACCREDITING PRODUCT<br />

In <strong>the</strong> first stage, <strong>the</strong> document that contains <strong>the</strong> characterization <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> problem<br />

statement about Planning <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English Language Teaching–Learning Process to<br />

develop <strong>the</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> and <strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong> will be presented.<br />

In <strong>the</strong> second stage, <strong>the</strong> document containing a critical analysis <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> problems <strong>of</strong><br />

<strong>planning</strong> in <strong>the</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> and <strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong> will be analyzed.<br />

In <strong>the</strong> third stage <strong>the</strong> document in which <strong>the</strong> syn<strong>the</strong>sis <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> first two stages and<br />

alternative proposal to solve this problem will be presented and exposed.<br />

M. EVALUATION, GRADING AND ACCREDITING<br />

THE EVALUATION<br />

It will be permanent, through methodological strategies that allow <strong>the</strong> critical analysis <strong>of</strong><br />

<strong>the</strong> academic <strong>process</strong> to be developed to reorient <strong>the</strong> activities <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> <strong>module</strong>, tutoring<br />

<strong>the</strong> research <strong>process</strong> and feedback <strong>the</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> and <strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong>.<br />

ACCREDITATING<br />

To accredit <strong>the</strong> <strong>module</strong> <strong>the</strong> following parameters will be taken into account:<br />

a) Research 40% 4<br />

b) English 40% 4<br />

c) Support 20% 2<br />

.......... ......<br />

100% 10 points<br />

GRADING<br />

The scoring will consist <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> sum <strong>of</strong> all <strong>the</strong> aspects mentioned earlier to 10 points,<br />

which will allow <strong>the</strong> approval or failing according to <strong>the</strong> General Regulation <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

University.<br />

Planning <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong>-<strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong> Páge 7


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

N. PROFESSOR´S STAFF<br />

Mg. Sc. Paola Moreno O.<br />

Dra. Sandra J. Ochoa de Maldonado.<br />

Verónica Richtarcikova<br />

Jamie Senescall<br />

O. BIBLIOGRAFÍA<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

BROWN H. Douglas. Teaching by principles. Edit Longman. Second edition<br />

2001<br />

RICHARDS, Jack and RODGERS, Theodore. Approaches and Methods in<br />

Language Teaching.<br />

HARMER, Jeremy. How to teach English. Edit Longman. First Published<br />

1998<br />

LINDSAY, Paul. Teaching English Worldwide. 2000 Alta Book Center<br />

Publishers<br />

SPRATT, Mary and elt. The <strong>teaching</strong> Knowledge Test. Cambridge<br />

University. First Published 2005<br />

RICHARDS, Jack, Strategic Reading 1. Cambridge University. Published<br />

2003<br />

OCEANO, Manual de la Educación<br />

11. WORKSHOPS<br />

Didactic Material (3 credits)<br />

Objective<br />

Elaborate didactic material that supports <strong>the</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> <strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong> for <strong>the</strong><br />

different levels.<br />

References<br />

Flannelboard, magnetboard and adhesive plastic.<br />

The wallpictures and wallposters<br />

Picture flash cards.<br />

Word flash cards<br />

Au<strong>the</strong>ntic printed materials.<br />

Syntactic Analysis <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English Language (3 credits)<br />

Objective<br />

Involve students to analyze <strong>the</strong> phonetics and morphological structure <strong>of</strong><br />

English <strong>language</strong>.<br />

Planning <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong>-<strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong> Páge 8


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

<br />

Understanding <strong>the</strong> Word combination in a structure, phrase, clause and<br />

sentences.<br />

Reference<br />

Nominal Nouns and phrasal verbs<br />

Basic patterns<br />

Classification ways<br />

Parts <strong>of</strong> speech (nouns, verbs, adjectives and Adverb.)<br />

Modifiers.<br />

Practice <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English Native Speech IV (3 credits)<br />

Objectives<br />

To encourage students to <strong>the</strong> practice <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English <strong>language</strong> in real situations<br />

with native speakers.<br />

To train students in <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English <strong>language</strong> in a intermediate level with<br />

<strong>the</strong> purpose to keep conversations with native speakers.<br />

References<br />

• Application <strong>of</strong> future and imperative expressions in dialogues<br />

• Delivery and reception <strong>of</strong> messages.<br />

Planning <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> English <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong>-<strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong> Páge 9


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

P. MATRIX OF THE MODULE<br />

PERÍOD<br />

RESEARCH<br />

PROCESS<br />

RESEARCH<br />

STRATEGIES<br />

THEORETICAL<br />

REFERENCES<br />

ACADÉMIC<br />

STRATEGIES<br />

PRACTICAL<br />

ACTIVITIES<br />

EVALUATION/GRADIN<br />

ACREDITING<br />

Sep<br />

13/14<br />

Information <strong>of</strong> general<br />

aspects related to <strong>the</strong><br />

<strong>module</strong><br />

Starting <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> <strong>module</strong><br />

Introducing<br />

techniques<br />

General information<br />

<strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> <strong>module</strong>.<br />

Agreements /<br />

commitments<br />

Sep.15<br />

Oct. 29<br />

2010<br />

FIRST STAGE<br />

Identification <strong>of</strong><br />

<strong>the</strong> problem<br />

statement related<br />

to <strong>the</strong> English<br />

Language<br />

<strong>planning</strong> in <strong>the</strong><br />

different<br />

educational<br />

establishments <strong>of</strong><br />

Loja city.<br />

Analysis <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

document.<br />

Study <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

information related<br />

to <strong>the</strong> research<br />

<strong>the</strong>me.<br />

Organization and<br />

systematization <strong>of</strong><br />

<strong>the</strong> information.<br />

Código de la niñez y<br />

adolescencia<br />

Planning<br />

Elements <strong>of</strong> <strong>planning</strong><br />

Planning and<br />

preparing a lesson or<br />

sequence <strong>of</strong> lessons<br />

Identifying and<br />

selecting aims<br />

Identifying <strong>the</strong> different<br />

components a lesson<br />

Presentation<br />

techniques and<br />

introductory activities<br />

Practice activities and<br />

task for <strong>language</strong> and<br />

skills development<br />

Choosing assessment<br />

activities<br />

Scanning and<br />

skimming strategy.<br />

Pre-instructional<br />

strategies<br />

Learning objectives.<br />

Motivating activities<br />

Problems<br />

Co-instructional<br />

Pair/group work<br />

Illustrations.<br />

Brainstorm<br />

Reports<br />

Summaries<br />

Presentations<br />

Post-instructional<br />

Graphic organizers<br />

Review and recycling<br />

Editing<br />

Round table<br />

Build up a graphic<br />

organizer.<br />

Beginning Activities<br />

Warmers.<br />

Lead-ins.<br />

Development<br />

activities.<br />

Presentations.<br />

Build up <strong>the</strong> problem<br />

statements.<br />

Definition <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

problem<br />

Formulate <strong>learning</strong><br />

objectives.<br />

Ending Activities<br />

Explanations <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

tasks individual /<br />

group<br />

Slide Presentations<br />

Assignments<br />

Oral quizzes<br />

Test<br />

Presentations<br />

Mind maps<br />

English <strong>language</strong> skills<br />

performance<br />

Conceptual maps<br />

Role play<br />

Dramatizations<br />

Reports<br />

Defined problem<br />

Total number <strong>of</strong> hours: first stage 160 hours (10 credits)<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 10


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

PERÍOD<br />

RESEARCH<br />

PROCESS<br />

RESEARCH<br />

STRATEGIES<br />

THEORETICAL<br />

REFERENCES<br />

ACADÉMIC<br />

STRATEGIES<br />

PRACTICAL<br />

ACTIVITIES<br />

EVALUATION/GRADIN<br />

ACREDITING<br />

Nov. 3<br />

Dec. 17<br />

2010<br />

SECOND STAGE<br />

Critical analysis <strong>of</strong><br />

<strong>planning</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

English <strong>language</strong><br />

and contrasting to<br />

<strong>the</strong> <strong>the</strong>oretical<br />

frame to <strong>the</strong><br />

reality observed<br />

Analysis <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

document.<br />

Study <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

information related<br />

to <strong>the</strong> research<br />

<strong>the</strong>me.<br />

Organization and<br />

systematization <strong>of</strong><br />

<strong>the</strong> information.<br />

Selection and use <strong>of</strong><br />

resources and<br />

materials.<br />

Selection and use <strong>of</strong><br />

<strong>the</strong> course book<br />

materials.<br />

Selection and use <strong>of</strong><br />

supplementary<br />

materials and<br />

activities.<br />

Selection and use <strong>of</strong><br />

<strong>teaching</strong> aids<br />

Managing <strong>the</strong><br />

<strong>teaching</strong> and <strong>learning</strong><br />

<strong>process</strong><br />

Identifying <strong>the</strong><br />

functions <strong>of</strong> learner’s<br />

<strong>language</strong><br />

Categorizing learners'<br />

mistakes<br />

Pre-instructional<br />

strategies<br />

Learning objectives.<br />

Motivating activities<br />

Problems<br />

Co-instructional<br />

Pair/group work<br />

Illustrations.<br />

Brainstorm<br />

Reports<br />

Summaries<br />

Presentations<br />

Post-instructional<br />

Graphic organizers<br />

Review and recycling<br />

Editing<br />

Round table<br />

.<br />

Beginning Activities<br />

Warmers.<br />

Lead-ins.<br />

Development<br />

activities.<br />

Presentations.<br />

Build up <strong>the</strong> problem<br />

statements.<br />

Definition <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

problem<br />

Formulate <strong>learning</strong><br />

objectives.<br />

Ending Activities<br />

Explanations <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

tasks individual /<br />

group<br />

Assignments<br />

Oral quizzes<br />

Test<br />

Presentations<br />

Mind maps<br />

English <strong>language</strong> skills<br />

performance<br />

Conceptual maps<br />

Role play<br />

Dramatizations<br />

Report <strong>of</strong> logical<br />

analysis <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

problem.<br />

Total number <strong>of</strong> hours: first stage 160 hours (10 credits)<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 11


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

PERÍOD<br />

RESEARCH<br />

PROCESS<br />

RESEARCH<br />

STRATEGIES<br />

THEORETICAL<br />

REFERENCES<br />

ACADÉMIC<br />

STRATEGIES<br />

PRACTICAL<br />

ACTIVITIES<br />

EVALUATION/GRADIN<br />

ACREDITING<br />

Jan. 3<br />

Feb. 11<br />

2011<br />

THIRD STAGE<br />

Definition <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

alternatives <strong>of</strong><br />

solution about<br />

<strong>planning</strong>, which<br />

may contribute to<br />

<strong>the</strong> improvement<br />

<strong>of</strong> pr<strong>of</strong>essional<br />

practice.<br />

Analysis <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

document.<br />

Study <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

information related<br />

to <strong>the</strong> research<br />

<strong>the</strong>me.<br />

Organization and<br />

systematization <strong>of</strong><br />

<strong>the</strong> information.<br />

Classroom<br />

management.<br />

Teacher roles<br />

Grouping learners<br />

Correcting learns<br />

Giving feedback<br />

Elaboration <strong>of</strong> Didactic<br />

material<br />

Pre-instructional<br />

strategies<br />

Learning objectives.<br />

Motivating activities<br />

Problems<br />

Co-instructional<br />

Pair/group work<br />

Illustrations.<br />

Brainstorm<br />

Reports<br />

Summaries<br />

Presentations<br />

Beginning Activities<br />

Warmers.<br />

Lead-ins.<br />

Development<br />

activities.<br />

Presentations.<br />

Build up <strong>the</strong> problem<br />

statements.<br />

Definition <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

problem<br />

Formulate <strong>learning</strong><br />

objectives.<br />

Assignments<br />

Oral quizzes<br />

Test<br />

Presentations<br />

Mind maps<br />

English <strong>language</strong> skills<br />

performance<br />

Conceptual maps<br />

Role play<br />

Dramatizations<br />

Execution <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

lesson plan<br />

Reports<br />

Alternatives <strong>of</strong> solution<br />

to <strong>the</strong> problem<br />

Post-instructional<br />

Ending Activities<br />

Graphic organizers<br />

Review and recycling<br />

Editing<br />

Round table<br />

Explanations <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

tasks individual /<br />

group<br />

Total number <strong>of</strong> hours: first stage 160 hours (10 credits)<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 12


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

First stage<br />

Contents<br />

• Código de la Niñez y adolescencia<br />

• Planning<br />

• Elements <strong>of</strong> <strong>planning</strong><br />

• Planning and preparing a lesson or sequence <strong>of</strong> lessons<br />

• Identifying and selecting aims<br />

• Identifying <strong>the</strong> different components a lesson<br />

• Presentation techniques and introductory activities<br />

• Practice activities and task for <strong>language</strong> and skills developent<br />

• Choosing assessment activities<br />

• LOS NIÑOS, NIÑAS Y ADOLESCENTES COMO SUJETOS DE<br />

DERECHOS<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 13


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

TITULO I<br />

DEFINICIONES<br />

Art. 1.- Finalidad.- Este Código dispone sobre la protección integral que<br />

el Estado, la sociedad y la familia deben garantizar a todos los niños, niñas y<br />

adolescentes que viven en el Ecuador, con el fin de lograr su desarrollo<br />

integral y el disfrute pleno de sus derechos, en un marco de libertad, dignidad<br />

y equidad.<br />

Para este efecto, regula el goce y ejercicio de los derechos, deberes y<br />

responsabilidades de los niños, niñas y adolescentes y los medios para<br />

hacerlos efectivos, garantizarlos y protegerlos, conforme al principio del interés<br />

superior de la niñez y adolescencia y a la doctrina de protección integral.<br />

Art. 2. - Sujetos protegidos.- Las normas del presente Código son<br />

aplicables a todo ser humano, desde su concepción hasta que cumpla<br />

dieciocho años de edad. Por excepción, protege a personas que han cumplido<br />

dicha edad, en los casos expresamente contemplados en este Código.<br />

Art. 3. - Supletoriedad. - En lo no previsto expresamente por este<br />

Código se aplicarán las demás normas del ordenamiento jurídico interno, que<br />

no contradigan los principios que se reconocen en este Código y sean más<br />

favorables para la vigencia de los derechos de la niñez y adolescencia.<br />

Art. 4. - Definición de niño, niña y adolescente.- Niño o niña es la<br />

persona que no ha cumplido doce años de edad. Adolescente es la persona<br />

de ambos sexos entre doce y dieciocho años de edad.<br />

Art. 5.- Presunción de edad.- Cuando exista duda sobre la edad de<br />

una persona, se presumirá que es niño o niña antes que adolescente; y que es<br />

adolescente, antes que mayor de dieciocho años.<br />

Art. 6.- Igualdad y no discriminación.- Todos los niños, niñas y<br />

adolescentes son iguales ante la ley y no serán discriminados por causa de su<br />

nacimiento, nacionalidad, edad, sexo, etnia; color, origen social, idioma,<br />

religión, filiación, opinión política, situación económica, orientación sexual,<br />

estado de salud, discapacidad o diversidad cultural o cualquier otra condición<br />

propia o de sus progenitores, representantes o familiares.<br />

El Estado adoptará las medidas necesarias para eliminar toda forma de<br />

discriminación.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 14


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Art. 7.- Niños, niñas y adolescentes, indígenas y afroecuatorianos.-<br />

La ley reconoce y garantiza el derecho de los niños, niñas y adolescentes de<br />

nacionalidades indígenas y afroecuatorianos, a desarrollarse de acuerdo a su<br />

cultura y en un marco de interculturalidad, conforme a lo dispuesto en la<br />

Constitución Política de la República, siempre que las prácticas culturales no<br />

conculquen sus derechos.<br />

Art. 8.- Corresponsabilidad del Estado, la sociedad y la familia.- Es<br />

deber del Estado, la sociedad y la familia, dentro de sus respectivos ámbitos,<br />

adoptar las medidas políticas, administrativas, económicas, legislativas,<br />

sociales y jurídicas que sean necesarias para la plena vigencia, ejercicio<br />

efectivo, garantía, protección y exigibilidad de la totalidad de los derechos de<br />

niños; niñas y adolescentes.<br />

El Estado y la sociedad formularán y aplicarán políticas públicas sociales y<br />

económicas; y destinarán recursos económicos suficientes, en forma estable,<br />

permanente y oportuna.<br />

Art. 9.- Función básica de la familia.- La ley reconoce y protege a la<br />

familia como el espacio natural y fundamental para el desarrollo integral del<br />

niño, niña y adolescente.<br />

Corresponde prioritariamente al padre y a la madre, la responsabilidad<br />

compartida del respeto, protección y cuidado de los hijos y la promoción,<br />

respeto y exigibilidad de sus derechos.<br />

Art. 10.- Deber del Estado frente a la familia.- El Estado tiene el deber<br />

prioritario de definir y ejecutar políticas, planes y programas que apoyen a la<br />

familia para cumplir con las responsabilidades especificadas en el artículo<br />

anterior.<br />

Art. 11.- El interés superior del niño.- El interés superior del niño es un<br />

principio que está orientado a satisfacer el ejercicio efectivo del conjunto de los<br />

derechos de los niños, niñas y adolescentes; e impone a todas las autoridades<br />

administrativas y judiciales y a las instituciones públicas y privadas, el deber<br />

de ajustar sus decisiones y acciones para su cumplimiento.<br />

Para apreciar el interés superior se considerará la necesidad de mantener un<br />

justo equilibrio entre los derechos y deberes de niños, niñas y adolescentes,<br />

en la forma que mejor convenga a la realización de sus derechos y garantías.<br />

Este principio prevalece sobre el principio de diversidad étnica y cultural.<br />

El interés superior del niño es un principio de interpretación de la presente<br />

Ley. Nadie podrá invocarlo contra norma expresa y sin escuchar previamente<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 15


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

la opinión del niño, niña o adolescente involucrado, que esté en condiciones<br />

de expresarla.<br />

Art. 12.- Prioridad absoluta.- En la formulación y ejecución de las<br />

políticas públicas y en la provisión de recursos, debe asignarse prioridad<br />

absoluta a la niñez y adolescencia, a las que se asegurará, además, el acceso<br />

preferente a los servicios públicos y a cualquier clase de atención que<br />

requieran.<br />

Se dará prioridad especial a la atención de niños y niñas menores de seis<br />

años.<br />

En caso de conflicto, los derechos de los niños, niñas y adolescentes<br />

prevalecen sobre los derechos de los demás.<br />

Art. 13.- Ejercicio progresivo. - El ejercicio de los derechos y garantías<br />

y el cumplimiento de los deberes y responsabilidades de niños, niñas y<br />

adolescentes se harán de manera progresiva, de acuerdo a su grado de<br />

desarrollo y madurez. Se prohíbe cualquier restricción al ejercicio de estos<br />

derechos y garantías que no esté expresamente contemplado en este Código.<br />

Art. 14.- Aplicación e interpretación más favorable al niño, niña y<br />

adolescente. - Ninguna autoridad judicial o administrativa podrá invocar falta<br />

o insuficiencia de norma o procedimiento expreso para justificar la violación o<br />

desconocimiento de los derechos de los niños, niñas y adolescentes.<br />

Las normas del ordenamiento jurídico, las cláusulas y estipulaciones de los<br />

actos y contratos en que intervengan niños, niñas o adolescentes, o que se<br />

refieran a ellos, deben interpretarse de acuerdo al principio del interés superior<br />

del niño.<br />

TITULO III<br />

DERECHOS, GARANTIAS Y DEBERES<br />

Capítulo I<br />

Disposiciones generales<br />

Art. 15. - Titularidad de derechos.- Los niños, niñas y adolescentes<br />

son sujetos de derechos y garantías y, como tales, gozan de todos aquellos<br />

que las leyes contemplan en favor de las personas, además de aquellos<br />

específicos de su edad.<br />

Los niños, niñas y adolescentes extranjeros que se encuentren bajo<br />

jurisdicción del Ecuador, gozarán de los mismos derechos y garantías<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 16


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

reconocidas por la ley a los ciudadanos ecuatorianos, con las limitaciones<br />

establecidas en la Constitución y en las leyes.<br />

Art. 16.- Naturaleza de estos derechos y garantías.- Por su<br />

naturaleza, los derechos y garantías de la niñez y adolescencia son de orden<br />

público, interdependientes, indivisibles, irrenunciables e intransigibles, salvo<br />

las excepciones expresamente señaladas en la ley.<br />

Art. 17. - Deber jurídico de denunciar.- Toda persona, incluidas las<br />

autoridades judiciales y administrativas, que por cualquier medio tenga<br />

conocimiento de la violación de un derecho del niño, niña o adolescente, está<br />

obligada a denunciarla ante la autoridad competente, en un plazo máximo de<br />

cuarenta y ocho horas.<br />

Art. 18.- Exigibilidad de los derechos.- Los derechos y garantías que<br />

las leyes reconocen en favor del niño, niña y adolescente, son potestades<br />

cuya observancia y protección son exigibles a las personas y organismos<br />

responsables de asegurar su eficacia, en la forma que este Código y más<br />

leyes establecen para el efecto.<br />

Art. 19.- Sanciones por violación de derechos. - Las violaciones a los<br />

derechos de los niños, niñas y adolescentes serán sancionadas en la forma<br />

prescrita en este Código y más leyes, sin perjuicio de la reparación que<br />

corresponda como consecuencia de la responsabilidad civil.<br />

Capítulo II<br />

Derechos de supervivencia<br />

Art. 20.- Derecho a la vida.- Los niños, niñas y adolescentes tienen<br />

derecho a la vida desde su concepción. Es obligación del Estado, la sociedad<br />

y la familia asegurar por todos los medios a su alcance, su supervivencia y<br />

desarrollo.<br />

Se prohíben los experimentos y manipulaciones médicas y genéticas desde la<br />

fecundación del óvulo hasta el nacimiento de niños, niñas y adolescentes; y la<br />

utilización de cualquier técnica o práctica que ponga en peligro su vida o<br />

afecte su integridad o desarrollo integral.<br />

Art. 21.- Derecho a conocer a los progenitores y mantener<br />

relaciones con ellos.- Los niños, niñas y adolescentes tienen derecho a<br />

conocer a su padre y madre, a ser cuidados por ellos y a mantener relaciones<br />

afectivas permanentes, personales y regulares con ambos progenitores y<br />

demás parientes, especialmente cuando se encuentran separados por<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 17


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

cualquier circunstancia, salvo que la convivencia o relación afecten sus<br />

derechos y garantías.<br />

No se les privará de este derecho por falta o escasez de recursos económicos<br />

de sus progenitores.<br />

En los casos de desconocimiento del paradero del padre, de la madre, o de<br />

ambos, el Estado, los parientes y demás personas que tengan información<br />

sobre aquél, deberán proporcionarla y <strong>of</strong>recer las facilidades para localizarlos.<br />

Art. 22.- Derecho a tener una familia y a la convivencia familiar.- Los<br />

niños, niñas y adolescentes tienen derecho a vivir y desarrollarse en su familia<br />

biológica. El Estado, la sociedad y la familia deben adoptar prioritariamente<br />

medidas apropiadas que permitan su permanencia en dicha familia.<br />

Excepcionalmente, cuando aquello sea imposible o contrario a su interés<br />

superior, los niños, niñas y adolescentes tienen derecho a otra familia, de<br />

conformidad con la ley.<br />

En todos los casos, la familia debe proporcionarles un clima de afecto y<br />

comprensión que permita el respeto de sus derechos y su desarrollo integral.<br />

El acogimiento institucional, el internamiento preventivo, la privación de<br />

libertad o cualquier otra solución que los distraiga del medio familiar, debe<br />

aplicarse como última y excepcional medida.<br />

Art. 23.- Protección prenatal.- Se sustituirá la aplicación de penas y<br />

medidas privativas de libertad a la mujer embarazada hasta noventa días<br />

después del parto, debiendo el Juez disponer las medidas cautelares que<br />

sean del caso.<br />

El Juez podrá ampliar este plazo en el caso de madres de hijos con<br />

discapacidad grave y calificada por el organismo pertinente, por todo el tiempo<br />

que sea menester, según las necesidades del niño o niña.<br />

El responsable de la aplicación de esta norma que viole esta prohibición o<br />

permita que otro la contravenga, será sancionado en la forma prevista en este<br />

Código.<br />

Art. 24.- Derecho a la lactancia materna.- Los niños y niñas tienen<br />

derecho a la lactancia materna para asegurarle el vínculo afectivo con su<br />

madre, adecuada nutrición, crecimiento y desarrollo.<br />

Es obligación de los establecimientos de salud públicos y privados desarrollar<br />

programas de estimulación de la lactancia materna.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 18


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Art. 25.- Atención al embarazo y al parto.- El poder público y las<br />

instituciones de salud y asistencia a niños, niñas y adolescentes crearán las<br />

condiciones adecuadas para la atención durante el embarazo y el parto, a<br />

favor de la madre y del niño o niña, especialmente tratándose de madres<br />

adolescentes y de niños o niñas con peso inferior a dos mil quinientos gramos.<br />

Art. 26.- Derecho a una vida digna.- Los niños, niñas y adolescentes<br />

tienen derecho a una vida digna, que les permita disfrutar de las condiciones<br />

socioeconómicas necesarias para su desarrollo integral.<br />

Este derecho incluye aquellas prestaciones que aseguren una alimentación<br />

nutritiva, equilibrada y suficiente, recreación y juego, acceso a los servicios de<br />

salud, a educación de calidad, vestuario adecuado, vivienda segura, higiénica<br />

y dotada de los servicios básicos.<br />

Para el caso de los niños, niñas y adolescentes con discapacidades, el<br />

Estado y las instituciones que las atienden deberán garantizar las condiciones,<br />

ayudas técnicas y eliminación de barreras arquitectónicas para la<br />

comunicación y transporte.<br />

Art. 27.- Derecho a la salud.- Los niños, niñas y adolescentes tienen<br />

derecho a disfrutar del más alto nivel de salud física, mental, psicológica y<br />

sexual.<br />

El derecho a la salud de los niños, niñas y adolescentes comprende:<br />

1. Acceso gratuito a los programas y acciones de salud públicos, a una<br />

nutrición adecuada y a un medio ambiente saludable;<br />

2. Acceso permanente e ininterrumpido a los servicios de salud públicos,<br />

para la prevención, tratamiento de las enfermedades y la rehabilitación<br />

de la salud. Los servicios de salud públicos son gratuitos para los niños,<br />

niñas y adolescentes que los necesiten;<br />

3. Acceso a medicina gratuita para los niños, niñas y adolescentes que las<br />

necesiten;<br />

4. Acceso inmediato y eficaz a los servicios médicos de emergencia,<br />

públicos y privados;<br />

5. Información sobre su estado de salud, de acuerdo al nivel evolutivo del<br />

niño, niña o adolescente;<br />

6. Información y educación sobre los principios básicos de prevención en<br />

materia de salud, saneamiento ambiental, primeros auxilios;<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 19


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

7. Atención con procedimientos y recursos de las medicinas alternativas y<br />

tradicionales;<br />

8. El vivir y desarrollarse en un ambiente estable y afectivo que les<br />

permitan un adecuado desarrollo emocional;<br />

9. El acceso a servicios que fortalezcan el vínculo afectivo entre el niño o<br />

niña y su madre y padre; y,<br />

10. El derecho de las madres a recibir atención sanitaria prenatal y postnatal<br />

apropiadas.<br />

Se prohíbe la venta de estupefacientes, substancias psicotrópicas y otras que<br />

puedan producir adicción, bebidas alcohólicas, pegamentos industriales,<br />

tabaco, armas de fuego y explosivos de cualquier clase, a niños, niñas y<br />

adolescentes.<br />

Art. 28.- Responsabilidad del Estado en relación a este derecho a la<br />

salud.- Son obligaciones del Estado, que se cumplirán a través del Ministerio<br />

de Salud:<br />

1. Elaborar y poner en ejecución las políticas, planes y programas que<br />

favorezcan el goce del derecho contemplado en el artículo anterior;<br />

2. Fomentar las iniciativas necesarias para ampliar la cobertura y calidad<br />

de los servicios de salud, particularmente la atención primaria de salud;<br />

y adoptará las medidas apropiadas para combatir la mortalidad materno<br />

infantil, la desnutrición infantil y las enfermedades que afectan a la<br />

población infantil;<br />

3. Promover la acción interdisciplinaria en el estudio y diagnóstico<br />

temprano de los retardos del desarrollo, para que reciban el tratamiento<br />

y estimulación oportunos;<br />

4. Garantizar la provisión de medicina gratuita para niños, niñas y<br />

adolescentes;<br />

5. Controlar la aplicación del esquema completo de vacunación;<br />

6. Desarrollar programas de educación dirigidos a los progenitores y<br />

demás personas a cargo del cuidado de los niños, niñas y adolescentes,<br />

para brindarles instrucción en los principios básicos de su salud y<br />

nutrición, y en las ventajas de la higiene y saneamiento ambiental; y,<br />

7. Organizar servicios de atención específica para niños, niñas y<br />

adolescentes con discapacidades físicas, mentales o sensoriales.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 20


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Art. 29.- Obligaciones de los progenitores.- Corresponde a los<br />

progenitores y demás personas encargadas del cuidado de los niños, niñas y<br />

adolescentes, brindar la atención de salud que esté a su alcance y asegurar el<br />

cumplimiento de las prescripciones, controles y disposiciones médicas y de<br />

salubridad.<br />

Art. 30.- Obligaciones de los establecimientos de salud.- Los<br />

establecimientos de salud, públicos y privados, cualquiera sea su nivel, están<br />

obligados a:<br />

1. Prestar los servicios médicos de emergencia a todo niño, niña y<br />

adolescente que los requieran, sin exigir pagos anticipados ni garantías<br />

de ninguna naturaleza. No se podrá negar esta atención a pretexto de la<br />

ausencia del representante legal, la carencia de recursos económicos, la<br />

falta de cupo, la causa u origen de la emergencia u otra circunstancia<br />

similar;<br />

2. Informar sobre el estado de salud del niño, niña o adolescente, a sus<br />

progenitores o representantes;<br />

3. Mantener registros individuales en los que conste la atención y<br />

seguimiento del embarazo, el parto y el puerperio; y registros<br />

actualizados de los datos personales, domicilio permanente y<br />

referencias familiares de la madre;<br />

4. Identificar a los recién nacidos inmediatamente después del parto,<br />

mediante el registro de sus impresiones dactilar y plantar y los nombres,<br />

apellidos, edad e impresión dactilar de la madre; y expedir el certificado<br />

legal correspondiente para su inscripción inmediata en el Registro Civil;<br />

5. Informar oportunamente a los progenitores sobre los requisitos y<br />

procedimientos legales para la inscripción del niño o niña en el Registro<br />

Civil;<br />

6. Garantizar la permanencia segura del recién nacido junto a su madre,<br />

hasta que ambos se encuentren en condiciones de salud que les<br />

permitan subsistir sin peligro fuera del establecimiento;<br />

7. Diagnosticar y hacer un seguimiento médico a los niños y niñas que<br />

nazcan con problemas patológicos o discapacidades de cualquier tipo;<br />

8. Informar oportunamente a los progenitores sobre los cuidados ordinarios<br />

y especiales que deben brindar al recién nacida, especialmente a los<br />

niños y niñas a quienes se haya detectado alguna discapacidad;<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 21


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

9. Incentivar que el niño o niña sea alimentado a través de la lactancia<br />

materna, por lo menos hasta el primer año de vida;<br />

10. Proporcionar un trato de calidez y calidad compatibles con la dignidad<br />

del niño, niña y adolescente;<br />

11. Informar inmediatamente a las autoridades y organismos competentes<br />

los casos de niños o niñas y adolescentes con indicios de maltrato o<br />

abuso sexual; y aquellos en los que se desconozca la identidad o el<br />

domicilio de los progenitores;<br />

12. Recoger y conservar los elementos de prueba de maltrato o abuso<br />

sexual; y,<br />

13. Informar a las autoridades competentes cuando nazcan niños con<br />

discapacidad evidente.<br />

Art. 31.- Derecho a la seguridad social.- Los niños, niñas y<br />

adolescentes tienen derecho a la seguridad social. Este derecho consiste en el<br />

acceso efectivo a las prestaciones y beneficios generales del sistema, de<br />

conformidad con la ley.<br />

Art. 32.- Derecho a un medio ambiente sano.- Todo los niños, niñas y<br />

adolescentes tienen derecho a vivir en un ambiente sano, ecológicamente<br />

equilibrado y libre de contaminación, que garantice su salud, seguridad<br />

alimentaria y desarrollo integral.<br />

El Gobierno Central y los gobiernos seccionales establecerán políticas claras y<br />

precisas para la conservación del medio ambiente y el ecosistema.<br />

Capítulo III<br />

Derechos relacionados con el desarrollo<br />

Art. 33. - Derecho a la identidad.- Los niños, niñas y adolescentes<br />

tienen derecho a la identidad y a los elementos que la constituyen,<br />

especialmente el nombre, la nacionalidad y sus relaciones de familia, de<br />

conformidad con la ley.<br />

Es obligación del Estado preservar la identidad de los niños; niñas y<br />

adolescentes y sancionar a los responsables de la alteración, sustitución o<br />

privación de este derecho.<br />

Art. 34.- Derecho a la identidad cultural.- Los niños, niñas y<br />

adolescentes tienen derecho a conservar, desarrollar, fortalecer y recuperar su<br />

identidad y valores espirituales, culturales, religiosos, lingüísticos, políticos y<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 22


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

sociales y a ser protegidos contra cualquier tipo de interferencia que tenga por<br />

objeto sustituir, alterar o disminuir estos valores.<br />

Art. 35. - Derecho a la identificación.- Los niños y niñas tienen derecho<br />

a ser inscritos inmediatamente después del nacimiento, con los apellidos<br />

paterno y materno que les correspondan. El Estado garantizará el derecho a la<br />

identidad y a la identificación mediante un servicio de Registro Civil con<br />

procedimientos ágiles, gratuitos y sencillos para la obtención de los<br />

documentos de identidad.<br />

Art. 36.- Normas para la identificación.- En la certificación de nacido<br />

vivo, que deberá ser emitida bajo la responsabilidad del centro o institución de<br />

salud pública o privada que atendió el nacimiento, constará la identificación<br />

dactilar de la madre y la identificación plantar del niño o niña recién nacido o<br />

nacida. En casos de inscripción tardía se deberá registrar en la ficha<br />

respectiva la identificación dactilar del niño, niña o adolescente.<br />

Cuando se desconozca la identidad de uno de los progenitores, el niño, niña o<br />

adolescente llevará los apellidos del progenitor que lo inscribe, sin perjuicio del<br />

derecho a obtener el reconocimiento legal del otro progenitor.<br />

Si se desconoce la identidad o domicilio de ambos progenitores, el niño, niña<br />

o adolescente se inscribirá por orden judicial o administrativa, con dos<br />

nombres y dos apellidos de uso común en el país. Se respetará el nombre con<br />

el cual ha sido conocido y se tomará en cuenta su opinión cuando sea posible.<br />

La inscripción podrá ser solicitada por la persona encargada del programa de<br />

protección a cargo del niño o niña o por la Junta de Protección de Derechos.<br />

Practicada la inscripción, el Jefe Cantonal del Registro Civil pondrá el caso en<br />

conocimiento de la Defensoría del Pueblo de la jurisdicción correspondiente,<br />

para que inicie las gestiones extrajudiciales tendientes al esclarecimiento de la<br />

filiación del niño o niña y posterior reconocimiento voluntario o entable la<br />

acción para que sea declarada judicialmente.<br />

Comprobada y resuelta por la autoridad judicial o administrativa competente<br />

la sustitución, confusión o privación de identidad o de alguno de sus<br />

elementos, el Registro Civil iniciará de inmediato los procedimientos idóneos<br />

para restablecerla sin costo alguno para el afectado.<br />

Los niños y niñas de las comunidades, pueblos y nacionalidades indígenas<br />

del país, tienen el derecho a ser inscritos con nombres propios del respectivo<br />

idioma. Las autoridades del Registro Civil tienen la obligación de inscribir estos<br />

nombres sin ningún tipo de limitación u objeción.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 23


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Art. 37.- Derecho a la educación.- Los niños, niñas y adolescentes<br />

tienen derecho a una educación de calidad. Este derecho demanda de un<br />

sistema educativo que:<br />

1. Garantice el acceso y permanencia de todo niño y niña a la educación<br />

básica, así como del adolescente hasta el bachillerato o su equivalente;<br />

2. Respete las culturas y especificidades de cada región y lugar;<br />

3. Contemple propuestas educacionales flexibles y alternativas para<br />

atender las necesidades de todos los niños, niñas y adolescentes, con<br />

prioridad de quienes tienen discapacidad, trabajan o viven una situación<br />

que requiera mayores oportunidades para aprender;<br />

4. Garantice que los niños, niñas y adolescentes cuenten con docentes,<br />

materiales didácticos, laboratorios, locales, instalaciones y recursos<br />

adecuados y gocen de un ambiente favorable para el aprendizaje. Este<br />

derecho incluye el acceso efectivo a la educación inicial de cero a cinco<br />

años, y por lo tanto se desarrollarán programas y proyectos flexibles y<br />

abiertos, adecuados a las necesidades culturales de los educandos; y,<br />

5. Que respete las convicciones éticas, morales y religiosas de los padres y<br />

de los mismos niños, niñas y adolescentes.<br />

La educación pública es laica en todos sus niveles, obligatoria hasta el décimo<br />

año de educación básica y gratuita hasta el bachillerato o su equivalencia.<br />

El Estado y los organismos pertinentes asegurarán que los planteles<br />

educativos <strong>of</strong>rezcan servicios con equidad, calidad y oportunidad y que se<br />

garantice también el derecho de los progenitores a elegir la educación que más<br />

convenga a sus hijos y a sus hijas.<br />

Art. 38.- Objetivos de los programas de educación.- La educación<br />

básica y media asegurarán los conocimientos, valores y actitudes<br />

indispensables para:<br />

a. Desarrollar la personalidad, las aptitudes y la capacidad mental y física<br />

del niño, niña y adolescente hasta su máximo potencial, en un entorno<br />

lúdico y afectivo;<br />

b. Promover y practicar la paz, el respeto a los derechos humanos y<br />

libertades fundamentales, la no discriminación, la tolerancia, la<br />

valoración de las diversidades, la participación, el diálogo, la autonomía<br />

y la cooperación;<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 24


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

c. Ejercitar, defender, promover y difundir los derechos de la niñez y<br />

adolescencia;<br />

d. Prepararlo para ejercer una ciudadanía responsable, en una sociedad<br />

libre, democrática y solidaria;<br />

e. Orientarlo sobre la función y responsabilidad de la familia, la equidad de<br />

sus relaciones internas, la paternidad y maternidad responsable y la<br />

conservación de la salud;<br />

f. Fortalecer el respeto a sus progenitores y maestros, a su propia<br />

identidad cultural, su idioma, sus valores, a los valores nacionales y a los<br />

de otros pueblos y culturas;<br />

g. Desarrollar un pensamiento autónomo, crítico y creativo;<br />

h. La capacitación para un trabajo productivo y para el manejo de<br />

conocimientos científicos y técnicos; e,<br />

i. El respeto al medio ambiente.<br />

Art. 39. - Derechos y deberes de los progenitores con relación al<br />

derecho a la educación.- Son derechos y deberes de los progenitores y<br />

demás responsables de los niños, niñas y adolescentes:<br />

1. Matricularlos en los planteles educativos;<br />

2. Seleccionar para sus hijos una educación acorde a sus principios y<br />

creencias;<br />

3. Participar activamente en el desarrollo de los procesos educativos;<br />

4. Controlar la asistencia de sus hijos, hijas o representados a los planteles<br />

educativos;<br />

5. Participar activamente para mejorar la calidad de la educación;<br />

6. Asegurar el máximo aprovechamiento de los medios educativos que les<br />

proporciona el Estado y la sociedad;<br />

7. Vigilar el respeto de los derechos de sus hijos, hijas o representados en<br />

los planteles educacionales; y,<br />

8. Denunciar las violaciones a esos derechos, de que tengan conocimiento.<br />

Art. 40.- Medidas disciplinarias.- La práctica docente y la disciplina en<br />

los planteles educativos respetarán los derechos y garantías de los niños,<br />

niñas y adolescentes; excluirán toda forma de abuso, maltrato y<br />

desvalorización, por tanto, cualquier forma de castigo cruel, inhumano y<br />

degradante.<br />

Art. 41.- Sanciones prohibidas.- Se prohíbe a los establecimientos<br />

educativos la aplicación de:<br />

1. Sanciones corporales;<br />

2. Sanciones psicológicas atentatorias a la dignidad de los niños, niñas y<br />

adolescentes;<br />

3. Se prohíben las sanciones colectivas; y,<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 25


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

4. Medidas que impliquen exclusión o discriminación por causa de una<br />

condición personal del estudiante, de sus progenitores, representantes<br />

legales o de quienes lo tengan bajo su cuidado. Se incluyen en esta<br />

prohibición las medidas discriminatorias por causa de embarazo o<br />

maternidad de una adolescente. A ningún niño, niña o adolescente se le<br />

podrá negar la matrícula o expulsar debido a la condición de sus padres.<br />

En todo procedimiento orientado a establecer la responsabilidad de un niño,<br />

niña o adolescente por un acto de indisciplina en un plantel educativo, se<br />

garantizará el derecho a la defensa del estudiante y de sus progenitores o<br />

representantes.<br />

Cualquier forma de atentado sexual en los planteles educativos será puesta<br />

en conocimiento del Agente Fiscal competente, para los efectos de la ley, sin<br />

perjuicio de las investigaciones y sanciones de orden administrativo que<br />

correspondan en el ámbito educativo.<br />

Art. 42.- Derecho a la educación de los niños, niñas y adolescentes<br />

con discapacidad.- Los niños, niñas y adolescentes con discapacidades<br />

tienen derecho a la inclusión en el sistema educativo, en la medida de su nivel<br />

de discapacidad. Todas las unidades educativas están obligadas a recibirlos y<br />

a crear los apoyos y adaptaciones físicas, pedagógicas, de evaluación y<br />

promoción adecuados a sus necesidades.<br />

Art. 43. - Derecho a la vida cultural.- Los niños, niñas y adolescentes<br />

tienen derecho a participar libremente en todas las expresiones de la vida<br />

cultural.<br />

En el ejercicio de este derecho pueden acceder a cualquier espectáculo<br />

público que haya sido calificado como adecuado para su edad, por la<br />

autoridad competente.<br />

Es obligación del Estado y los gobiernos seccionales impulsar<br />

actividades culturales, artísticas y deportivas a las cuales tengan acceso los<br />

niños, niñas y adolescentes.<br />

Art. 44.- Derechos culturales de los pueblos indígenas y negros o<br />

afroecuatorianos.- Todo programa de atención y cuidado a los niños, niñas y<br />

adolescentes de las nacionalidades y pueblos indígenas, negros o<br />

afroecuatorianos, deberá respetar la cosmovisión, realidad cultural y<br />

conocimientos de su respectiva nacionalidad o pueblo y tener en cuenta sus<br />

necesidades especificas, de conformidad con la Constitución y la ley.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 26


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Las entidades de atención, públicas y privadas, que brinden servicios a dichos<br />

niños, niñas y adolescentes, deberán coordinar sus actividades con las<br />

correspondientes entidades de esas nacionalidades o pueblos.<br />

Art. 45.- Derecho a la información.- Los niños, niñas y adolescentes<br />

tienen derecho a buscar y escoger información; y a utilizar los diferentes<br />

medios y fuentes de comunicación, con las limitaciones establecidas en la ley<br />

y aquellas que se derivan del ejercicio de la patria potestad.<br />

Es deber del Estado, la sociedad y la familia, asegurar que la niñez y<br />

adolescencia reciban una información adecuada, veraz y pluralista; y<br />

proporcionarles orientación y una educación crítica que les permita ejercitar<br />

apropiadamente los derechos señalados en el inciso anterior.<br />

Art. 46.- Prohibiciones relativas al derecho a la información. - Se<br />

prohíbe:<br />

1. La circulación de publicaciones, videos y grabaciones dirigidos y<br />

destinados a la niñez y adolescencia, que contengan imágenes, textos o<br />

mensajes inadecuados para su desarrollo; y cualquier forma de acceso<br />

de niños, niñas y adolescentes a estos medios;<br />

2. La difusión de información inadecuada para niños, niñas y adolescentes<br />

en horarios de franja familiar, ni en publicaciones dirigidas a la familia y a<br />

los niños, niñas y adolescentes; y,<br />

3. La circulación de cualquier producto destinado a niños, niñas y<br />

adolescentes, con envoltorios que contengan imágenes, textos o<br />

mensajes inadecuados para su desarrollo.<br />

Estas prohibiciones se aplican a los medios, sistemas de comunicación,<br />

empresas de publicidad y programas.<br />

Art. 47. - Garantías de acceso a una información adecuada.- Para<br />

garantizar el derecho a la información adecuada, de que trata el artículo<br />

anterior, el Estado deberá:<br />

a) Requerir a los medios de comunicación social, la difusión de información<br />

y materiales de interés social y cultural para niños, niñas y adolescentes;<br />

b) Exigirles que proporcionen, en forma gratuita, espacios destinados a<br />

programas del Consejo Nacional de Niñez y Adolescencia;<br />

c) Promover la producción y difusión de literatura infantil y juvenil;<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 27


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

d) Requerir a los medios de comunicación la producción y difusión de<br />

programas acordes con las necesidades lingüísticas de niños, niñas y<br />

adolescentes pertenecientes a los diversos grupos étnicos;<br />

e) Impedir la difusión de información inadecuada para niños, niñas y<br />

adolescentes en horarios de franja familiar, ni en publicaciones dirigidas<br />

a la familia y a los niños, niñas y adolescentes;<br />

f) Sancionar de acuerdo a lo previsto en esta Ley, a las personas que<br />

faciliten a los menores: libros, escritos, afiches, propaganda, videos o<br />

cualquier otro medio auditivo y/o visual que hagan apología de la<br />

violencia o el delito, que tengan imágenes o contenidos pornográficos o<br />

que perjudiquen la formación del menor; y,<br />

g) Exigir a los medios de comunicación audiovisual que anuncien con la<br />

debida anticipación y suficiente notoriedad, la naturaleza de la<br />

información y programas que presentan y la clasificación de la edad para<br />

su audiencia.<br />

Se consideran inadecuados para el desarrollo de los niños, niñas y<br />

adolescentes los textos, imágenes, mensajes y programas que inciten a la<br />

violencia, exploten el miedo o aprovechen la falta de madurez de los niños,<br />

niñas y adolescentes para inducirlos a comportamientos perjudiciales o<br />

peligrosos para su salud y seguridad personal y todo cuanto atente a la moral<br />

o el pudor.<br />

En cualquier caso, la aplicación de medidas o decisiones relacionadas con<br />

esta garantía, deberán observar fielmente las disposiciones del Reglamento<br />

para el Control de la Discrecionalidad de los Actos de la Administración<br />

Pública, expedido por el Presidente de la República.<br />

Art. 48.- Derecho a la recreación y al descanso.- Los niños, niñas y<br />

adolescentes tienen derecho a la recreación, al descanso, al juego, al deporte<br />

y más actividades propias de cada etapa evolutiva.<br />

Es obligación del Estado y de los gobiernos seccionales promocionar e<br />

inculcar en la niñez y adolescencia, la práctica de juegos tradicionales; crear y<br />

mantener espacios e instalaciones seguras y accesibles, programas y<br />

espectáculos públicos adecuados, seguros y gratuitos para el ejercicio de este<br />

derecho.<br />

Los establecimientos educativos deberán contar con áreas deportivas,<br />

recreativas, artísticas y culturales, y destinar los recursos presupuestarios<br />

suficientes para desarrollar estas actividades.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 28


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

El Consejo Nacional de la Niñez y Adolescencia dictará regulaciones sobre<br />

programas y espectáculos públicos, comercialización y uso de juegos y<br />

programas computarizados, electrónicos o de otro tipo, con el objeto de<br />

asegurar que no afecten al desarrollo integral de los niños, niñas y<br />

adolescentes.<br />

Art. 49.- Normas sobre el acceso a espectáculos públicos. - Se<br />

prohíbe el ingreso de niños, niñas y adolescentes a los espectáculos que<br />

hayan sido calificados como inconvenientes para su edad.<br />

Los espectáculos públicos adecuados para la niñez y adolescencia gozarán de<br />

un régimen especial respecto de los impuestos y contribuciones fiscales y<br />

municipales, que se reglamentará por las autoridades respectivas. Si se han<br />

organizado exclusivamente en beneficio de los establecimientos de protección,<br />

gozarán de exoneración de impuestos.<br />

En los espectáculos a que se refiere el artículo anterior, serán admitidos en<br />

forma gratuita y obligatoria los niños, niñas y adolescentes pertenecientes a<br />

establecimientos de protección.<br />

Las empresas responsables de los espectáculos deberán <strong>of</strong>recer las<br />

seguridades necesarias y garantizar las medidas en caso de accidente.<br />

Capítulo IV<br />

Derechos de protección<br />

Art. 50.- Derecho a la integridad personal.- Los niños, niñas y<br />

adolescentes tienen derecho a que se respete su integridad personal, física,<br />

psicológica, cultural, afectiva y sexual. No podrán ser sometidos a torturas,<br />

tratos crueles y degradantes.<br />

Art. 51.- Derecho a la libertad personal, dignidad, reputación, honor<br />

e imagen.- Los niños, niñas y adolescentes tienen derecho a que se respete:<br />

a) Su libertad, sin más limitaciones que las establecidas en la ley. Los<br />

progenitores y responsables de sus cuidados los orientarán en el<br />

ejercicio de este derecho; y,<br />

b) Su dignidad, autoestima, honra, reputación e imagen propia. Deberá<br />

proporcionárseles relaciones de calidez y buen trato fundamentadas en<br />

el reconocimiento de su dignidad y el respeto a las diferencias.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 29


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Art. 52.- Prohibiciones relacionadas con el derecho a la dignidad e<br />

imagen. Se prohíbe:<br />

1. La participación de niños, niñas y adolescentes en programas, mensajes<br />

publicitarios, en producciones de contenido pornográfico y en<br />

espectáculos cuyos contenidos sean inadecuados para su edad;<br />

2. La utilización de niños y niñas o adolescentes en programas o<br />

espectáculos de proselitismo político o religioso;<br />

3. La publicación o exhibición de noticias, reportajes, crónicas, historias de<br />

vida o cualquiera otra expresión periodística con imagen o nombres<br />

propios de niños, niñas o adolescentes que han sido víctimas de<br />

maltrato o abuso;<br />

4. La publicación o exhibición de imágenes y grabaciones o referencias<br />

escritas que permitan la identificación o individualización de un niño,<br />

niña o adolescente que ha sido víctima de maltrato, abuso sexual o<br />

infracción penal, y cualquier otra referencia al entorno en el que se<br />

desarrollan; y,<br />

5. La publicación del nombre, así como de la imagen de los menores<br />

acusados o sentenciados por delitos o faltas.<br />

Aun en los casos permitidos por la ley, no se podrá utilizar públicamente la<br />

imagen de un adolescente mayor de quince años, sin su autorización expresa;<br />

ni la de un niño, niña o adolescente menor de dicha edad, sin la autorización<br />

de su representante legal, quien sólo la dará si no lesiona los derechos de su<br />

representado.<br />

Art. 53. - Derecho a la privacidad y a la inviolabilidad del hogar y las<br />

formas de comunicación.- Sin perjuicio de la natural vigilancia de los padres<br />

y maestros, los niños, niñas y adolescentes tienen derecho a que se respete la<br />

intimidad de su vida privada y familiar; y la privacidad e inviolabilidad de su<br />

domicilio, correspondencia y comunicaciones telefónicas y electrónicas, de<br />

conformidad con la ley.<br />

Se prohíbe las injerencias arbitrarias o ilegales en su vida privada.<br />

Art. 54.- Derecho a la reserva de la información sobre antecedentes<br />

penales.- Los adolescentes que hayan sido investigados, sometidos a<br />

proceso, privados de su libertad o a quienes se haya aplicado una medida<br />

socio-educativa, con motivo de una infracción penal, tienen derecho a que no<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 30


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

se hagan públicos sus antecedentes policiales o judiciales y a que se respete<br />

la reserva de la información procesal en la forma dispuesta en esta Ley, a<br />

menos que el Juez competente lo autorice en resolución motivada, en la que<br />

se expongan con claridad y precisión las circunstancias que justifican hacer<br />

pública la información.<br />

Art. 55.- Derecho de los niños, niñas y adolescentes con<br />

discapacidades o necesidades especiales.- Además de los derechos y<br />

garantías generales que la ley contempla a favor de los niños, niñas y<br />

adolescentes, aquellos que tengan alguna discapacidad o necesidad especial<br />

gozarán de los derechos que sean necesarios para el desarrollo integral de su<br />

personalidad hasta el máximo de sus potencialidades y para el disfrute de una<br />

vida plena, digna y dotada de la mayor autonomía posible, de modo que<br />

puedan participar activamente en la sociedad, de acuerdo a su condición.<br />

Tendrán también el derecho a ser informados sobre las causas,<br />

consecuencias y pronóstico de su discapacidad y sobre los derechos que les<br />

asisten.<br />

El Estado asegurará el ejercicio de estos derechos mediante su acceso<br />

efectivo a la educación y a la capacitación que requieren; y la prestación de<br />

servicios de estimulación temprana, rehabilitación, preparación para la<br />

actividad laboral, esparcimiento y otras necesarias, que serán gratuitos para<br />

los niños, niñas y adolescentes cuyos progenitores o responsables de su<br />

cuidado no estén en condiciones de pagarlos.<br />

Art. 56.- Derecho de los hijos de las personas privadas de libertad.-<br />

Los niños; niñas y adolescentes que no gocen de su medio familiar por<br />

encontrarse uno o ambos progenitores privados de su libertad, deberán recibir<br />

protección y asistencia especiales del Estado, fuera de los centros de<br />

rehabilitación, mediante modalidades de atención que aseguren su derecho a<br />

la convivencia familiar y comunitaria y a las relaciones personales directas y<br />

regulares con sus progenitores.<br />

Art. 57.- Derecho a protección especial en casos de desastres y<br />

conflictos armados.- Los niños, niñas y adolescentes tienen derecho a<br />

protección especial en casos de desastres naturales y de conflictos armados<br />

internos o internacionales. Esta protección se expresará, entre otras medidas,<br />

en la provisión prioritaria de medios de evacuación de las zonas afectadas,<br />

alojamiento, alimentación, atención médica y medicinas.<br />

El Estado garantiza el respeto irrestricto de las normas del derecho<br />

internacional humanitario en favor de los niños, niñas y adolescentes a los que<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 31


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

se refiere este artículo; y asegurará los recursos, medios y mecanismos para<br />

que se reintegren a la vida social con la plenitud de sus derechos y deberes.<br />

Se prohíbe reclutar o permitir la participación directa de niños, niñas y<br />

adolescentes en hostilidades armadas internas e internacionales.<br />

Art. 58.- Derecho de los niños, niñas y adolescentes refugiados.-<br />

Los niños, niñas y adolescentes que soliciten o a quienes se les haya<br />

concedido el estatuto de refugiado, tienen derecho a recibir protección<br />

humanitaria y la asistencia necesaria para el pleno disfrute de sus derechos.<br />

El mismo derecho asiste a sus progenitores y a las personas encargadas de<br />

su cuidado.<br />

Capítulo V<br />

Derechos de participación<br />

Art. 59.- Derecho a la libertad de expresión.- Los niños, niñas y<br />

adolescentes tienen derecho a expresarse libremente, a buscar, recibir y<br />

difundir informaciones e ideas de todo tipo, oralmente, por escrito o cualquier<br />

otro medio que elijan, con las únicas restricciones que impongan la ley, el<br />

orden público, la salud o la moral públicas para proteger la seguridad,<br />

derechos y libertades fundamentales de los demás.<br />

Art. 60.- Derecho a ser consultados.- Los niños, niñas y adolescentes<br />

tienen derecho a ser consultados en todos los asuntos que les afecten. Esta<br />

opinión se tendrá en cuenta en la medida de su edad y madurez.<br />

Ningún niño, niña o adolescente podrá ser obligado o presionado de cualquier<br />

forma para expresar su opinión.<br />

Art. 61.- Derecho a la libertad de pensamiento, conciencia y<br />

religión.- El Estado garantiza, en favor de los niños, niñas y adolescentes, las<br />

libertades de pensamiento, de conciencia y de religión, sujetas a las<br />

limitaciones prescritas por la ley y que sean necesarias para proteger la<br />

seguridad, los derechos y libertades fundamentales de los demás.<br />

Es derecho y deber de los progenitores y demás personas encargadas de su<br />

cuidado, orientar al niño, niña o adolescente para el adecuado ejercicio de<br />

este derecho, según su desarrollo evolutivo.<br />

Art. 62.- Derecho a la libertad de reunión.- Los niños, niñas y<br />

adolescentes tienen derecho a reunirse pública y pacíficamente para la<br />

promoción, defensa y ejercicio de sus derechos y garantías.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 32


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Art. 63.- Derecho de libre asociación.- Los niños, niñas y adolescentes<br />

tienen derecho a asociarse libremente con fines lícitos. Este derecho incluye la<br />

posibilidad de los adolescentes de constituir asociaciones sin fines de lucro,<br />

con arreglo a la ley.<br />

El Estado garantizará y fomentará el ejercicio de este derecho; principalmente<br />

en materia de asociaciones estudiantiles, culturales, deportivas, laborales y<br />

comunitarias.<br />

Se prohíbe cualquier restricción al ejercicio de este derecho, que no esté<br />

expresamente prevista en la ley.<br />

Capítulo VI<br />

Deberes, capacidad y responsabilidad de los niños, niñas y adolescentes<br />

Art. 64.- Deberes.- Los niños, niñas y adolescentes tienen los deberes<br />

generales que la Constitución Política impone a los ciudadanos, en cuanto<br />

sean compatibles con su condición y etapa evolutiva. Están obligados de<br />

manera especial a:<br />

1. Respetar a la Patria y sus símbolos;<br />

2. Conocer la realidad del país, cultivar la identidad nacional y respetar su<br />

pluriculturalidad; ejercer y defender efectivamente sus derechos y<br />

garantías;<br />

3. Respetar los derechos y garantías individuales y colectivas de los<br />

demás;<br />

4. Cultivar los valores de respeto, solidaridad, tolerancia, paz, justicia,<br />

equidad y democracia;<br />

5. Cumplir sus responsabilidades relativas a la educación;<br />

6. Actuar con honestidad y responsabilidad en el hogar y en todas las<br />

etapas del proceso educativo;<br />

7. Respetar a sus progenitores, maestros y más responsables de su<br />

cuidado y educación; y,<br />

8. Respetar y contribuir a la preservación del medio ambiente y de los<br />

recursos naturales.<br />

Art. 65.- Validez de los actos jurídicos.- La capacidad jurídica respecto<br />

a los actos celebrados por niños, niñas y adolescentes se estará a lo previsto<br />

en el Código Civil, a excepción de los siguientes casos:<br />

1. Los actos y contratos de los adolescentes que no han cumplido quince<br />

años, son relativamente nulos sin perjuicio de la validez que la ley<br />

confiera para la celebración de determinados actos;<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 33


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

2. Las personas que han cumplido quince años, además, tienen capacidad<br />

legal para celebrar contratos de trabajo según las normas del presente<br />

Código; y,<br />

3. Para celebrar los actos y contratos que estén comprendidos en el objeto<br />

de una organización estudiantil, laboral, cultural, artística, ambiental,<br />

deportiva o vecinal, de las que sean personeros o legítimos<br />

representantes en el ejercicio de su derecho de asociación y cuya<br />

cuantía no exceda a dos mil dólares.<br />

Los adolescentes podrán ejercer directamente aquellas acciones judiciales<br />

encaminadas al ejercicio y protección de sus derechos y garantías. Los niños y<br />

niñas podrán pedir directamente auxilio para la protección de sus derechos<br />

cuando deban dirigir la acción contra su representante legal.<br />

Art. 66.- Responsabilidad de los niños, niñas y adolescentes. - Los<br />

niños y niñas están exentos de responsabilidad jurídica. Por sus hechos y<br />

actos dañosos, responderán civilmente sus progenitores o guardadores en los<br />

casos y formas previstos en el Código Civil.<br />

Los adolescentes son responsables por sus actos jurídicos y hechos ilícitos,<br />

en los términos de este Código. Su responsabilidad civil por los actos o<br />

contratos que celebren se hará efectiva sobre su peculio pr<strong>of</strong>esional o<br />

industrial o sobre los bienes de la asociación que representen de acuerdo con<br />

lo prevenido en el artículo anterior, según sea el caso.<br />

TITULO IV<br />

De la protección contra el maltrato, abuso, explotación<br />

sexual, trafico y perdida de niños, niñas y adolescentes<br />

Art. 67.- Concepto de maltrato.- Se entiende por maltrato toda<br />

conducta, de acción u omisión, que provoque o pueda provocar daño a la<br />

integridad o salud física, psicológica o sexual de un niño, niña o adolescente,<br />

por parte de cualquier persona, incluidos sus progenitores, otros parientes,<br />

educadores y personas a cargo de su cuidado; cualesquiera sean el medio<br />

utilizado para el efecto, sus consecuencias y el tiempo necesario para la<br />

recuperación de la víctima. Se incluyen en esta calificación el trato negligente<br />

o descuido grave o reiterado en el cumplimiento de las obligaciones para con<br />

los niños, niñas y adolescentes, relativas a la prestación de alimentos,<br />

alimentación, atención médica educación o cuidados diarios; y su utilización<br />

en la mendicidad.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 34


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Maltrato psicológico es el que ocasiona perturbación emocional, alteración<br />

psicológica o disminución de la autoestima en el niño, niña o adolescente<br />

agredido. Se incluyen en esta modalidad las amenazas de causar un daño en<br />

su persona o bienes o en los de sus progenitores, otros parientes o personas<br />

encargadas de su cuidado.<br />

El maltrato es institucional cuando lo comete un servidor de una institución<br />

pública o privada, como resultado de la aplicación de reglamentos, prácticas<br />

administrativas o pedagógicas aceptadas expresa o tácitamente por la<br />

institución; y cuando sus autoridades lo han conocido y no han adoptado las<br />

medidas para prevenirlo, hacerlo cesar, remediarlo y sancionarlo de manera<br />

inmediata.<br />

La responsabilidad por maltrato institucional recae en el autor del maltrato y<br />

en el representante legal, autoridad o responsable de la institución o<br />

establecimiento al que pertenece.<br />

En el caso de los representantes legales, autoridades o responsables de la<br />

institución o establecimiento, la responsabilidad se hará efectiva de<br />

conformidad con las disposiciones previstas en la Constitución Política de la<br />

República, en el Código Civil y demás leyes aplicables.<br />

Art. 68.- Concepto de abuso sexual.- Sin perjuicio de lo que dispone el<br />

Código Penal sobre la materia, para los efectos del presente Código<br />

constituye abuso sexual todo contacto físico, sugerencia de naturaleza sexual,<br />

a los que se somete un niño, niña o adolescente, aun con su aparente<br />

consentimiento, mediante seducción, chantaje, intimidación, engaños,<br />

amenazas, o cualquier otro medio.<br />

Cualquier forma de acoso o abuso sexual será puesta en conocimiento del<br />

Agente Fiscal competente para los efectos de la ley, sin perjuicio de las<br />

investigaciones y sanciones de orden administrativo que correspondan.<br />

Art. 69.- Concepto de explotación sexual.- Constituyen explotación<br />

sexual la prostitución y la pornografía infantil. Prostitución infantil es la<br />

utilización de un niño, niña o adolescente en actividades sexuales a cambio de<br />

remuneración o de cualquier otra retribución. Pornografía infantil es toda<br />

representación, por cualquier medio, de un niño, niña y adolescente en<br />

actividades sexuales explícitas, reales o simuladas; o de sus órganos<br />

genitales, con la finalidad de promover, sugerir o evocar la actividad sexual.<br />

Art. 70.- Concepto de tráfico de niños.- Se entiende por tráfico de<br />

niños, niñas o adolescentes, su sustracción, traslado o retención, dentro o<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 35


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

fuera del país y por cualquier medio, con el propósito de utilizarlos en la<br />

prostitución, explotación sexual o laboral, pornografía, narcotráfico, tráfico de<br />

órganos, servidumbre, adopciones ilegales u otras actividades ilícitas.<br />

Se consideran medios de tráfico, entre otros, la sustitución de persona, el<br />

consentimiento fraudulento o forzado y la entrega o recepción de pagos o<br />

beneficios indebidos dirigidos a lograr el consentimiento de los progenitores,<br />

de las personas o de la institución a cuyo cargo se halla el niño, niña o<br />

adolescente.<br />

Art. 71.- Concepto de pérdida de niños, niñas o adolescentes.- Para<br />

efectos de este Código, se considera pérdida de niños, niñas o adolescentes,<br />

su ausencia voluntaria o involuntaria del hogar, establecimiento educativo u<br />

otro lugar en el que se supone deben permanecer, sin el conocimiento de sus<br />

progenitores o responsables de su cuidado.<br />

Art. 72.- Personas obligadas a denunciar.- Las personas que por su<br />

pr<strong>of</strong>esión u <strong>of</strong>icio tengan conocimiento de un hecho que presente<br />

características propias de maltrato, abuso y explotación sexual, tráfico o<br />

pérdida de que hubiere sido víctima un niño, niña o adolescente, deberán<br />

denunciarlo dentro de las veinticuatro horas siguientes de dicho conocimiento<br />

ante cualquiera de los fiscales, autoridades judiciales o administrativas<br />

competentes, incluida la Defensoría del Pueblo, como entidad garante de los<br />

derechos fundamentales.<br />

Art. 73.- Deber de protección en los casos de maltrato.- Es deber de<br />

todas las personas intervenir en el acto para proteger a un niño, niña o<br />

adolescente en casos flagrantes de maltrato, abuso sexual, tráfico y<br />

explotación sexual y otras violaciones a sus derechos; y requerir la<br />

intervención inmediata de la autoridad administrativa, comunitaria o judicial.<br />

Art. 74.- Prevención y políticas respecto de las materias que trata el<br />

presente título.- El Estado adoptará las medidas legislativas, administrativas,<br />

sociales, educativas y de otra índole, que sean necesarias para proteger a los<br />

niños, niñas y adolescentes contra las conductas y hechos previstos en este<br />

título, e impulsará políticas y programas dirigidos a:<br />

1. La asistencia a la niñez y adolescencia y a las personas responsables<br />

de su cuidado y protección, con el objeto de prevenir estas formas de<br />

violación de derechos;<br />

2. La prevención e investigación de los casos de maltrato, abuso y<br />

explotación sexual, tráfico y pérdida;<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 36


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

3. La búsqueda, recuperación y reinserción familiar, en los casos de<br />

pérdida, plagio, traslado ilegal y tráfico; y,<br />

4. El fomento de una cultura de buen trato en las relaciones cotidianas<br />

entre adultos, niños, niñas y adolescentes.<br />

En el desarrollo de las políticas y programas a los que se refiere este artículo,<br />

se asegurará la participación de la sociedad, la familia, los niños, niñas y<br />

adolescentes.<br />

Art. 75.- Prevención del maltrato institucional.- El Estado planificará y<br />

pondrá en ejecución medidas administrativas, legislativas, pedagógicas, de<br />

protección, atención, cuidado y demás que sean necesarias, en instituciones<br />

públicas y privadas, con el fin de erradicar toda forma de maltrato y abuso, y<br />

de mejorar las relaciones entre adultos y niños, niñas y adolescentes, y de<br />

éstos entre sí, especialmente en el entorno de su vida cotidiana.<br />

Las prácticas administrativas, pedagógicas, formativas, culturales<br />

tradicionales, de protección, atención, cuidado y de cualquier otra clase que<br />

realice toda institución pública o privada, deben respetar los derechos y<br />

garantías de los niños, niñas y adolescentes, y excluir toda forma de maltrato y<br />

abuso.<br />

Art. 76.- Prácticas culturales de maltrato.- No se admitirá como<br />

justificación de las prácticas a las que se refiere este capítulo, ni de atenuación<br />

para efecto de establecer las responsabilidades consiguientes, la alegación de<br />

que constituyen métodos formativos o que son prácticas culturales<br />

tradicionales.<br />

Art. 77.- Protección contra el traslado y retención ilícitos de niños,<br />

niñas y adolescentes.- Se prohíbe el traslado y la retención de niños, niñas y<br />

adolescentes cuando violan el ejercicio de la patria potestad, el régimen de<br />

visitas o las normas sobre autorización para salir del país.<br />

Los niños, niñas y adolescentes que han sido trasladados o retenidos<br />

ilegalmente, tienen derecho a ser reintegrados a su medio familiar y a gozar<br />

de las visitas de sus progenitores y otros parientes de conformidad con lo<br />

previsto en este Código.<br />

El Estado tomará todas las medidas que sean necesarias para lograr el<br />

regreso y reinserción familiar del niño, niña o adolescente que se encuentre en<br />

la situación prevista en este artículo.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 37


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Art. 78.- Derecho a protección contra otras formas de abuso.- Los<br />

niños, niñas y adolescentes tienen derecho a que se les brinde protección<br />

contra:<br />

1. El consumo y uso indebido de bebidas alcohólicas, tabaco,<br />

estupefacientes y substancias psicotrópicas;<br />

2. La participación en la producción, comercialización y publicidad de las<br />

substancias y objetos a que se refieren los numerales 1 y 3;<br />

3. El uso de armas, explosivos y substancias que pongan en riesgo su vida<br />

o su integridad personal;<br />

4. La exposición pública de sus enfermedades o discapacidades orgánicas<br />

o funcionales, para la obtención de beneficios económicos; y,<br />

5. La inducción a los juegos de azar.<br />

Art. 79. - Medidas de protección para los casos previstos en este<br />

título.- Para los casos previstos en este título y sin perjuicio de las medidas<br />

generales de protección previstas en este Código y más leyes, las autoridades<br />

administrativas y judiciales competentes ordenarán una o más de las<br />

siguientes medidas:<br />

1. Allanamiento del lugar donde se encuentre el niño, niña o adolescente,<br />

víctima de la práctica ilícita, para su inmediata recuperación. Esta<br />

medida sólo podrá ser decretada por el Juez de la Niñez y Adolescencia,<br />

quien la dispondrá de inmediato y sin formalidad alguna;<br />

2. Custodia familiar o acogimiento institucional;<br />

3. Inserción del niño, niña o adolescente y su familia en un programa de<br />

protección y atención;<br />

4. Concesión de boletas de auxilio a favor del niño, niña o adolescente, en<br />

contra de la persona agresora;<br />

5. Amonestación al agresor;<br />

6. Inserción del agresor en un programa de atención especializada;<br />

7. Orden de salida del agresor de la vivienda, si su convivencia con la<br />

víctima implica un riesgo para la seguridad física, psicológica o sexual<br />

de esta última; y de reingreso de la víctima, si fuere el caso;<br />

8. Prohibición al agresor de acercarse a la víctima o mantener cualquier<br />

tipo de contacto con ella;<br />

9. Prohibición al agresor de pr<strong>of</strong>erir amenazas, en forma directa o indirecta,<br />

contra la víctima o sus parientes;<br />

10. Suspensión del agresor en las tareas o funciones que desempeña;<br />

11. Suspensión del funcionamiento de la entidad o establecimiento donde se<br />

produjo el maltrato institucional, mientras duren las condiciones que<br />

justifican la medida;<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 38


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

12. Participación del agresor o del personal de la institución en la que se<br />

haya producido el maltrato institucional, en talleres, cursos o cualquier<br />

modalidad de eventos formativos; y,<br />

13. Seguimiento por parte de los equipos de trabajo social, para verificar la<br />

rectificación de las conductas de maltrato.<br />

En casos de emergencia que aporten indicios serios de agresión o amenaza<br />

contra la integridad física, sicológica o sexual del niño, niña o adolescente o de<br />

delito flagrante, las entidades de atención autorizadas podrán ejecutar<br />

provisionalmente las medidas de los numerales 2 a 9, 12 y 13, y ponerlo en<br />

conocimiento de la autoridad competente en el plazo máximo de setenta y dos<br />

horas, para que disponga las medidas definitivas.<br />

Art. 80.- Exámenes médico legales.- Los exámenes médico legales a<br />

un niño, niña o adolescente, se practicarán en estrictas condiciones de<br />

confidencialidad y respeto a la intimidad e integridad física y emocional del<br />

paciente.<br />

Salvo que ello sea imprescindible para su tratamiento y recuperación, se<br />

prohíbe volver a someter a un niño; niña o adolescente víctima de alguna de<br />

las formas de maltrato o abuso señalados en este título, a un mismo examen o<br />

reconocimiento médico legal.<br />

Los pr<strong>of</strong>esionales de la salud que realicen estos exámenes, están obligados a<br />

conservar en condiciones de seguridad los elementos de prueba encontrados;<br />

y a rendir testimonio propio sobre el contenido de sus informes.<br />

Los informes de dichos exámenes, realizados por pr<strong>of</strong>esionales de<br />

establecimientos de salud públicos o privados y entidades de atención<br />

autorizadas, tendrán valor legal de informe pericial.<br />

TITULO V<br />

DEL TRABAJO DE NIÑOS, NINAS Y ADOLESCENTES<br />

Capítulo I<br />

Disposiciones Generales<br />

Art. 81.- Derecho a la protección contra la explotación laboral.- Los<br />

niños, niñas y adolescentes tienen derecho a que el Estado, la sociedad y la<br />

familia les protejan contra la explotación laboral y económica y cualquier forma<br />

de esclavitud, servidumbre, trabajo forzoso o nocivo para su salud, su<br />

desarrollo físico, mental, espiritual, moral o social, o que pueda entorpecer el<br />

ejercicio de su derecho a la educación.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 39


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Art. 82.- Edad mínima para el trabajo.- Se fija en quince años la edad<br />

mínima para todo tipo de trabajo, incluido el servicio doméstico, con las<br />

salvedades previstas en este Código, más leyes e instrumentos<br />

internacionales con fuerza legal en el país.<br />

La infracción a lo dispuesto en el inciso anterior, no libera al patrono de<br />

cumplir con las obligaciones laborales y sociales que le impone la relación de<br />

trabajo.<br />

El Consejo Nacional de la Niñez y Adolescencia, de <strong>of</strong>icio o a petición de<br />

cualquier entidad pública o privada, podrá autorizar edades mínimas por sobre<br />

la señalada en el inciso anterior, de conformidad con lo establecido en este<br />

Código, la ley y en los instrumentos internacionales legalmente ratificados por<br />

el Ecuador.<br />

Art. 83.- Erradicación del trabajo infantil.- El Estado y la sociedad<br />

deben elaborar y ejecutar políticas, planes, programas y medidas de<br />

protección tendientes a erradicar el trabajo de los niños, niñas y de los<br />

adolescentes que no han cumplido quince años. La familia debe contribuir al<br />

logro de este objetivo.<br />

Art. 84. - Jornada de trabajo y educación.- Por ningún motivo la<br />

jornada de trabajo de los adolescentes podrá exceder de seis horas diarias<br />

durante un período máximo de cinco días a la semana; y se organizará de<br />

manera que no limite el efectivo ejercicio de su derecho a la educación.<br />

Los progenitores del adolescente que trabaja, los responsables de su<br />

cuidado, sus patronos y las personas para quienes realizan una actividad<br />

productiva, tienen la obligación de velar porque terminen su educación básica<br />

y cumplan sus deberes académicos.<br />

Art. 85.- Registro de adolescentes trabajadores.- El Ministerio de<br />

Trabajo llevará un registro de los adolescentes que trabajan por cantones,<br />

debiendo remitir la información periódicamente a los concejos cantonales de la<br />

Niñez y Adolescencia.<br />

El reglamento establecerá la forma de llevar dicho registro y los datos que<br />

deben registrarse.<br />

Art. 86.- Excepción relativa a los trabajos formativos realizados<br />

como prácticas culturales.- La limitación de edad señalada en el artículo 82<br />

no se aplicará a los trabajos considerados como prácticas ancestrales<br />

formativas, siempre que reúnan las siguientes condiciones.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 40


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

1. Que respeten el desarrollo físico y psicológico del adolescente, en el<br />

sentido de asignárseles solamente tareas acordes con sus capacidades<br />

y etapa evolutiva;<br />

2. Que contribuyan a la formación y desarrollo de las destrezas y<br />

habilidades del adolescente;<br />

3. Que transmitan valores y normas culturales en armonía con el desarrollo<br />

del adolescente; y,<br />

4. Que se desarrollen en el ámbito y beneficio de la comunidad a la que<br />

pertenece el adolescente o su familia.<br />

Art. 87.- Trabajos prohibidos.- Se prohíbe el trabajo de adolescentes:<br />

1. En minas, basurales, camales, canteras e industrias extractivas de<br />

cualquier clase;<br />

2. En actividades que implican la manipulación de substancias explosivas,<br />

psicotrópicas, tóxicas, peligrosas o nocivas para su vida, su desarrollo<br />

físico o mental y su salud;<br />

3. En prostíbulos o zonas de tolerancia, lugares de juegos de azar,<br />

expendio de bebidas alcohólicas y otros que puedan ser inconvenientes<br />

para el desarrollo moral o social del adolescente;<br />

4. En actividades que requieran el empleo de maquinaria peligrosa o que lo<br />

exponen a ruidos que exceden los límites legales de tolerancia;<br />

5. En una actividad que pueda agravar la discapacidad, tratándose de<br />

adolescentes que la tengan;<br />

6. En las demás actividades prohibidas en otros cuerpos legales, incluidos<br />

los instrumentos internacionales ratificados por el Ecuador; y,<br />

7. En hogares cuyos, miembros tengan antecedentes como autores de<br />

abuso o maltrato.<br />

El Consejo Nacional de la Niñez y Adolescencia determinará las formas<br />

específicas de trabajo peligroso, nocivo o riesgoso que están prohibidos para<br />

los adolescentes, tomando en cuenta su naturaleza, condiciones y riesgo para<br />

su vida e integridad personal, salud, educación, seguridad y desarrollo integral.<br />

Capítulo II<br />

Trabajo en relación de dependencia<br />

Art. 88.- Formas del contrato de trabajo.- El contrato individual de<br />

trabajo de los adolescentes se celebrará por escrito y se registrará en el<br />

Municipio y en la Inspección del Trabajo de la respectiva jurisdicción.<br />

El patrono tiene la obligación de registrar el contrato de trabajo en el plazo de<br />

treinta días, sin perjuicio del derecho del adolescente para solicitar por sí<br />

mismo dicho registro.<br />

A falta de contrato escrito, el adolescente podrá probar la relación laboral por<br />

cualquier medio, incluso el juramento deferido.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 41


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Siempre que una persona se beneficie del trabajo de un adolescente; se<br />

presume, para todos los efectos legales, la existencia de una relación laboral.<br />

Art. 89.- Derechos laborales y sociales.- Los adolescentes que<br />

trabajan bajo relación de dependencia, disfrutan de todos los derechos y<br />

beneficios, individuales y colectivos, que contemplan las leyes laborales, de<br />

seguridad social y educación; más los derechos específicos contemplados en<br />

el presente Código.<br />

Art. 90.- De los aprendices.- En los contratos de aprendizaje constará<br />

una cláusula sobre los mecanismos de transferencia al adolescente, de los<br />

conocimientos del <strong>of</strong>icio, arte o forma de trabajo. Estos contratos no durarán<br />

más de dos años, en el caso del trabajo artesanal, y seis meses, en el trabajo<br />

industrial u otro tipo de trabajo.<br />

Los patronos garantizarán especialmente el ejercicio de los derechos de<br />

educación, salud y descanso de sus aprendices.<br />

En ningún caso la remuneración del adolescente aprendiz será inferior al 80%<br />

de la remuneración que corresponde al adulto para este tipo de trabajo, arte u<br />

<strong>of</strong>icio.<br />

Art. 91.- Trabajo doméstico.- Los adolescentes que trabajen en el<br />

servicio doméstico tendrán los mismos derechos y garantías que los<br />

adolescentes trabajadores en general.<br />

El patrono velará por la integridad física, psicológica y moral del adolescente y<br />

garantizará sus derechos a la alimentación, educación, salud, descanso y<br />

recreación.<br />

Art. 92.- Trabajo formativo.- Los niños, niñas y adolescentes podrán<br />

realizar actividades de formación que incorporen al trabajo como un elemento<br />

importante en su formación integral. Estas actividades deberán realizarse en<br />

condiciones adecuadas para su edad, capacidad, estado físico y desarrollo<br />

intelectual, respetando sus valores morales y culturales, sus derechos al<br />

descanso, recreación y juego.<br />

Los programas que incorporen al trabajo con la finalidad señalada en este<br />

artículo, darán prioridad a las exigencias pedagógicas relacionadas con el<br />

desarrollo integral del niño, niña o adolescente, por sobre los objetivos<br />

productivos.<br />

Capítulo III<br />

Trabajo sin relación de dependencia<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 42


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Art. 93.- Trabajo por cuenta propia.- Los municipios otorgarán, en sus<br />

respectivas jurisdicciones, los permisos para que los adolescentes que hayan<br />

cumplido quince años ejerzan actividades económicas por cuenta propia,<br />

siempre que no sean de aquellas consideradas como perjudiciales o nocivas o<br />

que se encuentren prohibidas en este u otros cuerpos legales.<br />

Cada Municipio llevará un registro de estas autorizaciones y controlará el<br />

desarrollo de las actividades autorizadas a los adolescentes.<br />

Los adolescentes autorizados de conformidad con el inciso anterior, recibirán<br />

del Municipio un carné laboral que les proporcionará los siguientes beneficios:<br />

acceso gratuito a los espectáculos públicos que determine el reglamento,<br />

acceso preferente a programas de protección tales como comedores<br />

populares, servicios médicos, albergues nocturnos, matrícula gratuita y<br />

exención de otros pagos en los centros educativos fiscales y municipales.<br />

El Consejo Nacional de la Niñez y Adolescencia dictará el Reglamento para la<br />

emisión del carné laboral y la regulación de los beneficios que otorga.<br />

Capítulo IV<br />

De las medidas de protección y de las sanciones relacionadas con el<br />

trabajo<br />

Art. 94.- Medidas de protección.- En los casos de infracción a las<br />

disposiciones del presente título, los jueces y autoridades administrativas<br />

competentes podrán ordenar una o más de las siguientes medidas de<br />

protección a favor de los niños, niñas y adolescentes afectados, sin perjuicio<br />

de las demás contempladas en este Código:<br />

1. La orden de separar al niño, niña o adolescente de la actividad laboral;<br />

2. La inserción del niño, niña o adolescente y/o su familia, en un programa<br />

de protección; y,<br />

3. La separación temporal del medio familiar del niño, niña, adolescente o<br />

agresor, según sea el caso.<br />

Se adoptarán las providencias necesarias para que la aplicación de estas<br />

medidas no afecte los derechos y garantías de los niños, niñas y<br />

adolescentes, más allá de las restricciones inherentes a cada una de ellas; y<br />

para asegurar el sustento diario del niño, niña o adolescente, de una manera<br />

compatible con su derecho a una vida digna.<br />

Art. 95.- Sanciones aplicables por violación a las disposiciones<br />

referentes al trabajo.- La violación de las prohibiciones contenidas en este<br />

título, será reprimida con una o más de las siguientes sanciones, sin perjuicio<br />

de las contempladas en otros cuerpos legales:<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 43


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

1. Amonestación a los progenitores o a las personas encargadas del<br />

cuidado del niño, niña o adolescente; y a quienes los empleen o se<br />

beneficien directamente con su trabajo;<br />

2. Multa de cincuenta a trescientos dólares, si los infractores son los<br />

progenitores o responsables del cuidado del niño, niña o adolescente;<br />

3. Multa de doscientos a mil dólares, si se trata del empleador o cualquier<br />

persona que se beneficie directa o indirectamente del trabajo del niño,<br />

niña o adolescente; y,<br />

4. Clausura del establecimiento donde se realiza el trabajo, en caso de<br />

reincidencia.<br />

PLANNING<br />

The action or <strong>process</strong> <strong>of</strong> making plan for something<br />

THE THREE ELEMENTS OF PLANNING<br />

Long term plans called key stage plans (Macro-Planning)<br />

There are different ways <strong>of</strong> describing long-term plans. For <strong>the</strong> purpose <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>se<br />

materials, a long-term plan is <strong>the</strong> planned programmed <strong>of</strong> work for a subject<br />

across <strong>the</strong> school, covering one or more key stages.<br />

Long-term <strong>planning</strong> for a subject happens in <strong>the</strong> context <strong>of</strong> a school's overall<br />

curriculum plan (<strong>the</strong> long-term planned program <strong>of</strong> work in all subjects covering<br />

every year group in a school). Schools develop <strong>the</strong>ir own individual curriculum<br />

plans to reflect <strong>the</strong>ir context and characteristics, as well as <strong>the</strong>ir values, aims<br />

and priorities.<br />

A long-term plan shows how units <strong>of</strong> work in a subject are sequenced and<br />

distributed across years and key stages. Schools make decisions about <strong>the</strong><br />

order and timing <strong>of</strong> units in a subject, focusing on curriculum continuity and<br />

progression in pupils' <strong>learning</strong>. These decisions might change from year to year<br />

to take into account new initiatives or o<strong>the</strong>r changes. Many schools also identify<br />

opportunities to highlight important links with work in o<strong>the</strong>r subjects in <strong>the</strong>ir longterm<br />

plans.<br />

Medium term plans (unit, topics or enquiries) (Meso-Planning)<br />

There are different ways <strong>of</strong> describing medium-term plans. For <strong>the</strong> purpose <strong>of</strong><br />

<strong>the</strong>se materials, a medium-term plan is a planned sequence <strong>of</strong> work for a<br />

subject (or for more than one subject) for a period <strong>of</strong> weeks, such as a half term<br />

or term, or for a number <strong>of</strong> lessons.<br />

Medium-term <strong>planning</strong> focuses on organizing coherent units <strong>of</strong> work. Mediumterm<br />

plans identify <strong>learning</strong> objectives and outcomes and indicate <strong>the</strong> activities<br />

that will enable <strong>the</strong>se to be achieved. They usually show a sequence <strong>of</strong><br />

[Escribir texto] Página 44


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

activities that will promote progression and some information about <strong>the</strong> amount<br />

<strong>of</strong> time needed to cover <strong>the</strong> objectives (whe<strong>the</strong>r in blocked periods or regular<br />

lessons over a period <strong>of</strong> weeks).<br />

Short term plan, also called lesson-or weekly plans (Micro-Planning)<br />

There are different ways <strong>of</strong> describing short-term plans. For <strong>the</strong> purpose <strong>of</strong><br />

<strong>the</strong>se materials, a short-term plan is a set <strong>of</strong> activities for a week, a day, or a<br />

lesson.<br />

Short-term <strong>planning</strong> is based on <strong>the</strong> needs <strong>of</strong> individual schools and teachers.<br />

Teachers <strong>of</strong>ten use short-term plans to think through <strong>the</strong> structure and content<br />

<strong>of</strong> a lesson and to note information such as key questions, resources,<br />

differentiation and assessment opportunities, especially where this is not<br />

already included in <strong>the</strong> medium-term plan.<br />

Many teachers use lesson plans selectively, for particular activities or subjects,<br />

ra<strong>the</strong>r than for every lesson. Experienced teachers <strong>of</strong>ten work direct from a<br />

medium-term plan and make notes as and when needed to support <strong>the</strong>ir<br />

<strong>teaching</strong>.<br />

LESSON PLANNING AND USE OR RESOURCES FOR<br />

LANGUAGE TEACHING<br />

Planning and preparing a lesson or sequence <strong>of</strong><br />

lessons<br />

Identifying and selecting aims<br />

How do we identify and select aims?<br />

Aims are what we want learners to learn or be able to do at <strong>the</strong> end <strong>of</strong> a lesson,<br />

a sequence (i.e. a series) <strong>of</strong> lessons or a whole course. Aims may focus, for<br />

example, on a function or a grammatical structure, on <strong>the</strong> vocabulary <strong>of</strong> a<br />

particular topic or on developing a <strong>language</strong> skill. Aims, especially for younger<br />

learners, may not always focus on particular areas <strong>of</strong> <strong>language</strong>. The aim <strong>of</strong> a<br />

lesson may also be listening to a story for pleasure or encouraging a positive<br />

attitude towards <strong>the</strong> foreign <strong>language</strong>. To identify and select <strong>the</strong> most<br />

appropriate aims, we need to ask ourselves two questions:<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 45


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

What do my learners already know?<br />

What do <strong>the</strong>y need to know?<br />

The answers to <strong>the</strong>se questions will help us to make sure that <strong>the</strong> aims are <strong>the</strong><br />

right ones for a particular group <strong>of</strong> learners at a particular time.<br />

• Key concepts<br />

Look at <strong>the</strong> table. Can you work out what <strong>the</strong> difference is between main arms,<br />

subsidiary aims and personal aims?<br />

Maim aim Subsidiary aims Personal aims<br />

To practice making<br />

polite requests in <strong>the</strong><br />

context <strong>of</strong><br />

making holiday<br />

arrangements.<br />

Example exponent:<br />

Could you give me some<br />

information about<br />

hotels?<br />

Grammar: to revise modal auxiliary<br />

verbs.<br />

Functional exponents: Could/Would<br />

you...?<br />

Vocabulary: to consolidate lexis for<br />

travel, accommodation.<br />

Phonology: to focus on intonation.<br />

Speaking: to give controlled oral<br />

practice<br />

To improve<br />

my<br />

organization<br />

<strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

whiteboard; to<br />

give clearer<br />

examples.<br />

A main aim, like <strong>the</strong> one above, describes <strong>the</strong> most important thing we want to<br />

achieve in a lesson or sequence <strong>of</strong> lessons. For example, we may want<br />

learners to understand and practice using new <strong>language</strong>; to reinforce or<br />

consolidate (i.e. to make stronger) <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>the</strong>y already know by<br />

giving <strong>the</strong>m fur<strong>the</strong>r practice; or to revise <strong>language</strong> <strong>the</strong>y have recently learnt. On<br />

a lesson plan <strong>the</strong> main aim should also include an example <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> target<br />

<strong>language</strong> we are <strong>planning</strong> to teach.<br />

As well as a main aim, a lesson may also have subsidiary aims. Subsidiary<br />

aims show <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> or skills learners must be able to use well in order to<br />

achieve <strong>the</strong> main aim <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson. In <strong>the</strong> example on page 86, <strong>the</strong> main aim is<br />

to practice making polite requests; <strong>the</strong> subsidiary aims describe <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong><br />

and skill that learners will need to make <strong>the</strong>se requests. Stating both main and<br />

subsidiary aims is a good way <strong>of</strong> making sure that our lesson plan focuses on<br />

what we want our learners to learn, or to be able to do. It enables us to see how<br />

<strong>the</strong> lesson should develop, from one stage (or part) to <strong>the</strong> next, building up our<br />

learners' knowledge or skills in <strong>the</strong> best possible order.<br />

In addition to <strong>learning</strong> aims for <strong>the</strong> learners, we may also want to think about<br />

our own personal aims as teachers. Personal aims show what we would like to<br />

improve or focus on in our own <strong>teaching</strong>. Like <strong>the</strong> ones in <strong>the</strong> table on page 86,<br />

<strong>the</strong>se might be about improving <strong>the</strong> way that we handle aids and materials or<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 46


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

particular <strong>teaching</strong> techniques, or <strong>the</strong>y might be about our relationship with <strong>the</strong><br />

learners. Here are some more examples:<br />

• To try different correction techniques<br />

• To remember to check instructions<br />

• To write more dearly on <strong>the</strong> blackboard/whiteboard<br />

• To make more use <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> phonemic chart (a poster with phonemic symbols)<br />

• To get learners to work with different partners o to get quieter learners to<br />

answer questions.<br />

Identifying and selecting aims are <strong>the</strong> first steps in <strong>planning</strong> a lesson. Once we<br />

have decided on <strong>the</strong> aims, we can design or select <strong>the</strong> most appropriate<br />

activities, put <strong>the</strong>m in <strong>the</strong> best order and choose <strong>the</strong> most suitable <strong>teaching</strong> aids<br />

(things we can use to support our <strong>teaching</strong> in <strong>the</strong> classroom) and materials.<br />

After <strong>the</strong> lesson, we can look back at this part <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> plan to see whe<strong>the</strong>r we<br />

have achieved our aims, i.e. whe<strong>the</strong>r we have succeeded in <strong>teaching</strong> what we<br />

planned to teach. This also helps us to select <strong>the</strong> most appropriate aims for<br />

future lessons.<br />

• Key concepts and <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> classroom<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

The syllabus (I.e. <strong>the</strong> course programme) and/or <strong>the</strong> coursebook will give us<br />

a general direction for <strong>planning</strong> our <strong>teaching</strong>. To decide on specific aims for<br />

a particular lesson, however, we should think about our learners' needs and<br />

<strong>the</strong> stage <strong>the</strong>y have reached in <strong>the</strong>ir <strong>learning</strong>.<br />

We can identify and select appropriate personal aims in a similar way, i.e. by<br />

looking back at earlier lessons we have taught and thinking about things that<br />

worked well and things we want to improve.<br />

We should not confuse aims and procedures. Aims describe what <strong>the</strong><br />

learners will learn or what <strong>the</strong>y will be able to do with <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong>, while<br />

procedures - for example, listening to a recording and answering questions<br />

about it - are what <strong>the</strong> teacher and learners will do at each stage <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

lesson.<br />

Aims should not be too general. 'To teach <strong>the</strong> past simple' or 'to develop<br />

learners' reading skills' do not say enough about <strong>the</strong> purpose <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson.<br />

More specific aims might be 'to introduce and practice <strong>the</strong> past simple for<br />

talking about personal experiences' or 'to give learners practice in predicting<br />

content, scanning for specific information and guessing meaning from<br />

context'.<br />

We shouldn't plan to do too much in a lesson. The amount we plan to cover<br />

will depend on <strong>the</strong> length <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson and <strong>the</strong> learners' level.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 47


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

<br />

<br />

Learners also need to know what <strong>the</strong> lesson is going to be about. It is <strong>of</strong>ten<br />

helpful to announce our aims (or to write <strong>the</strong>m up on <strong>the</strong> board) at <strong>the</strong><br />

beginning <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson, and/or to repeat <strong>the</strong>m at <strong>the</strong> end.<br />

Learners <strong>of</strong> all ages find it helpful to know why <strong>the</strong>y are doing things. For<br />

younger learners <strong>the</strong> aims <strong>of</strong> a lesson can be described in very simple<br />

<strong>language</strong>, focusing on <strong>the</strong> things <strong>the</strong>y will do in <strong>the</strong> lesson and <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong><br />

knowledge <strong>the</strong>y will take away from it. (For example: ´Today we're going to<br />

read a story and learn how to describe people in English'.)<br />

FOLLOW-UP ACTIVITY<br />

The procedures in <strong>the</strong> table below show a sequence <strong>of</strong> activities for a lesson<br />

with <strong>the</strong> main aim <strong>of</strong> developing intermediate students' confidence and skill in<br />

informal conversation. The subsidiary aims| for <strong>the</strong> lesson (A-H) are in <strong>the</strong><br />

wrong order. Put <strong>the</strong>m in <strong>the</strong> right order so that <strong>the</strong>y match <strong>the</strong> correct<br />

procedures.<br />

Procedure<br />

1 Students move around <strong>the</strong> classroom to find<br />

students with matching halves <strong>of</strong> sentences.<br />

2 They talk in pairs about what <strong>the</strong>y find difficult<br />

in listening to informal conversation.<br />

3 They hear an informal conversation and<br />

identify speakers, place and situation.<br />

4 They listen again and fill in missing phrases in<br />

<strong>the</strong> transcript.<br />

5 Repetition drill: students practice key phrases.<br />

Pairs practice simple two-line exchanges using<br />

key phrases.<br />

6 Pairs write and practice <strong>the</strong>ir own<br />

conversation from role cards, using key phrases<br />

where possible. Several pairs perform and<br />

record conversations.<br />

7 Class comment and suggest improvements to<br />

grammar and vocabulary.<br />

Subsidiary aims<br />

A • to give students fluency practice<br />

• to practice using target <strong>language</strong> in a<br />

meaningful context<br />

B- to develop peer correction skills<br />

C • to listen for detailed information<br />

• to focus students' attention on target<br />

<strong>language</strong><br />

D • to practice gist listening<br />

• to create a context<br />

E • to get students actively involved<br />

• to put students into pairs<br />

F • to give students confidence in speaking<br />

through controlled practice<br />

G • to review <strong>the</strong> whole lesson<br />

• to give <strong>the</strong> teacher feedback<br />

8 Students discuss what <strong>the</strong>y have learnt. H • to raise awareness <strong>of</strong> what <strong>the</strong> lesson aim<br />

will be<br />

• to encourage personal involvement<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 48


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

REFLECTION<br />

Think about <strong>the</strong>se comments from teachers. Which do you agree with and why?<br />

1. I <strong>of</strong>ten discover what my aims are while I am <strong>teaching</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson.<br />

Sometimes I only find out when <strong>the</strong> lesson is over.<br />

2. Learners don't want to know about aims. They just want to get on with<br />

<strong>the</strong> lesson.<br />

3. My coursebook always tells me what my aims should be.<br />

PRACTICE TASK<br />

For questions 1-7 match <strong>the</strong> stages <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson with <strong>the</strong> subsidiary aims<br />

listed A-H. There is one extra option which you do not need to use.<br />

Lesson summaries<br />

1. Learners put jumbled sections <strong>of</strong> a text in order. The teacher focuses on<br />

conjunctions, time expressions, pronouns, etc. learners make notes on a<br />

similar topic, and <strong>the</strong>n <strong>the</strong>y produce a similar text.<br />

2. Learners look at a town map and discuss <strong>the</strong> best route from <strong>the</strong> station<br />

to a hotel, and <strong>the</strong>n <strong>the</strong>y listen to a conversation on cassette and<br />

compare <strong>the</strong>ir route with <strong>the</strong> one on <strong>the</strong> cassette.<br />

3. In pairs learners read different text about soldiers duties and <strong>the</strong>y<br />

exchange information about <strong>the</strong>m. Pair work toge<strong>the</strong>r to complete lists <strong>of</strong><br />

rules for soldiers, using must, should, doesn´t, don’t, have to.<br />

4. Learners brainstorm vocabulary and ideas on <strong>the</strong> topic, and <strong>the</strong>n in<br />

groups <strong>the</strong>y draft <strong>the</strong> text for a leaflet to advertise <strong>the</strong>ir town to tourist.<br />

Groups <strong>the</strong>n exchange text to make corrections and / or suggest<br />

improvements.<br />

5. Learners listen to a dialogue and identify <strong>the</strong> tense <strong>the</strong> speakers use top<br />

talk about future arrangements. The teacher check understanding.<br />

Learners do repetitions drills, and <strong>the</strong>n <strong>the</strong>y practice using <strong>the</strong> structure<br />

in a guided role play.<br />

6. Learners work in large groups to brain storm ideas on different roles and<br />

<strong>the</strong>n form new groups for a role-based discussion. The teacher monitors<br />

<strong>the</strong> discussion<br />

7. Learners match words with pictures and build up word maps, wich <strong>the</strong>y<br />

compare and develop. Then <strong>the</strong>y work toge<strong>the</strong>r to produce entries for a<br />

class dictionary.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 49


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Lesson aims<br />

A. To practice listening for details<br />

B. To practice writing for a communicative purpose<br />

C. To present and provide controlled practice <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> present progressive<br />

D. To revise and practice modal auxiliary verbs<br />

E. To train learners to learn autonomously<br />

F. To give learners oral fluency practice<br />

G. To raise awareness <strong>of</strong> how to join sentences and paragraphs<br />

H. To revise and consolidate vocabulary.<br />

Identifying <strong>the</strong> different components <strong>of</strong> a lesson plan<br />

• How do we identify <strong>the</strong> different components <strong>of</strong> a lesson plan?<br />

Choose <strong>the</strong> comparison that you think best describes a lesson plan.<br />

A lesson plan is like ... an instruction leaflet a photograph a story a road map<br />

a computer program a series <strong>of</strong> road signs a written summary something else?<br />

A lesson plan is a set <strong>of</strong> notes that helps us to think through what we are going<br />

to teach and how we are going to teach it. It also guides us during and after <strong>the</strong><br />

lesson. We can identify <strong>the</strong> most important components <strong>of</strong> a lesson plan by<br />

thinking carefully about what we want our learners to do and how we want <strong>the</strong>m<br />

to do it.<br />

The main components <strong>of</strong> a lesson plan show us what <strong>the</strong> lesson is for (<strong>the</strong><br />

aims) and what <strong>the</strong> teacher and <strong>the</strong> learners will do during <strong>the</strong> lesson and how<br />

<strong>the</strong>y will do it (<strong>the</strong> procedures). O<strong>the</strong>r components help us to think about<br />

possible problems and remind us <strong>of</strong> things we need to remember about <strong>the</strong><br />

learners. So a lesson plan is most like a road map or a series <strong>of</strong> road signs, i.e.<br />

something that shows us where we are going and how we are going to get <strong>the</strong>re<br />

- although we may sometimes find that during <strong>the</strong> journey we have to take a<br />

different route!<br />

Here are some ways a lesson plan helps <strong>the</strong> teacher.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 50


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Before <strong>the</strong> lesson<br />

During <strong>the</strong> lesson<br />

After <strong>the</strong> lesson<br />

Writing down <strong>the</strong> aims and <strong>the</strong> procedures for each stage <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

lesson helps us to make sure that we have planned <strong>the</strong> best<br />

possible sequence to enable us to achieve those aims.<br />

The plan can also help <strong>the</strong> teacher to check tinning— <strong>the</strong> amount<br />

<strong>of</strong> time we plan for each stage - and to check that <strong>the</strong> lesson is<br />

following <strong>the</strong> sequence we decided on.<br />

We can keep <strong>the</strong> plan as a record <strong>of</strong> what happened, making any<br />

changes necessary to show how <strong>the</strong> lesson was different from <strong>the</strong><br />

plan. We can <strong>the</strong>n use <strong>the</strong> plan and notes to help plan <strong>the</strong> next<br />

lesson. (At this stage, <strong>the</strong> plan may be more like a photograph, a<br />

story or a summary, giving us a record <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson.)<br />

• Key concepts<br />

A lesson plan can include <strong>the</strong> following headings. Which ones do you think<br />

should always appear? Which ones may only appear sometimes?<br />

Lesson plan headings<br />

Level and number <strong>of</strong><br />

learners<br />

Timetable fit<br />

Main aim(s)<br />

Subsidiary aims<br />

Personal aims<br />

Assumptions<br />

Anticipated <strong>language</strong><br />

problems<br />

Possible solutions<br />

Teaching aids, materials,<br />

equipment<br />

Procedures<br />

Timing<br />

Interaction patterns<br />

Homework<br />

who we are <strong>planning</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson for<br />

how <strong>the</strong> lesson is connected to <strong>the</strong> last lesson and/or <strong>the</strong> next<br />

one<br />

what we want learners to learn or to be able to do by <strong>the</strong> end <strong>of</strong><br />

<strong>the</strong> lesson<br />

o<strong>the</strong>r things we want learners to be able to do during <strong>the</strong> lesson<br />

because <strong>the</strong>y lead to <strong>the</strong> main aim<br />

aspects <strong>of</strong> our own <strong>teaching</strong> we want to develop or improve<br />

what we think learners already know or can already do related to<br />

<strong>the</strong> aims<br />

things that learners may find difficult<br />

action we will take to deal with <strong>the</strong> anticipated problems<br />

useful reminders <strong>of</strong> things to take to <strong>the</strong> lesson<br />

tasks and activities for each stage<br />

length <strong>of</strong> time needed for each stage<br />

ways in which learners work at different stages, i.e. individually,<br />

in pairs, in groups, as a whole class<br />

It is usually a good idea to anticipate possible problems and solutions, but in a<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 51


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

revision lesson we may not need <strong>the</strong>se headings. Also, we may not have<br />

personal aims for every lesson, and we may not always give learners<br />

homework!<br />

• Key concepts and <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> classroom<br />

Look carefully at this example <strong>of</strong> part <strong>of</strong> a lesson plan which aims to introduce<br />

and practice <strong>language</strong> for giving advice. Then read <strong>the</strong> points below.<br />

Timing Procedure Subsidiary aims<br />

Aids and<br />

materials<br />

Interaction<br />

pattern<br />

5 minutes<br />

Ask students who<br />

<strong>the</strong>y ask for<br />

advice if <strong>the</strong>y<br />

have a problem.<br />

Warmer/lead-in: to<br />

get students talking<br />

and introduce<br />

<strong>the</strong> topic<br />

- Pairwork<br />

10 minutes<br />

Discuss typical<br />

problems for young<br />

people; elicit<br />

<strong>language</strong> to ask for<br />

and give advice.<br />

To create context<br />

To revise modal<br />

auxiliary verbs<br />

To elicit/introduce<br />

vocabulary<br />

Magazine<br />

pictures<br />

Whiteboard<br />

Teacher →<br />

whole class<br />

5 minutes<br />

Show headlines for<br />

students to guess<br />

<strong>the</strong> content <strong>of</strong><br />

letters to <strong>the</strong> advice<br />

page in a teen<br />

magazine<br />

To get students<br />

ready for reading<br />

To predict content<br />

To use students'<br />

own knowledge<br />

OHP<br />

Teacher→<br />

whole class<br />

15 minutes<br />

Students read<br />

different mini-texts.<br />

<strong>the</strong>n summarise <strong>the</strong><br />

content <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

letters.<br />

To check predictions<br />

Intensive reading<br />

To introduce <strong>the</strong><br />

structure 'If I were<br />

you, I'd...'<br />

Photocopies <strong>of</strong><br />

six problem page<br />

letters<br />

1st group work<br />

↓<br />

2nd group work<br />

(new groups)<br />

• When we make a lesson plan, we need to ask ourselves how <strong>the</strong><br />

procedures we have planned will help to achieve our aims and to make sure<br />

<strong>the</strong>re are strong connections between <strong>the</strong> different stages.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 52


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

• We also need to consider variety/ i.e. how we can use different activity<br />

types, <strong>language</strong> skills and interaction patterns. Learners <strong>of</strong> all ages need<br />

different activities in a lesson, but this is especially important for younger<br />

learners.<br />

• During <strong>the</strong> lesson we should teach <strong>the</strong> learners, not <strong>the</strong> lesson plan! We<br />

must be prepared, if necessary, to change our plan while we are <strong>teaching</strong>. If<br />

we have a dear plan, we will be more aware <strong>of</strong> what we are changing and<br />

why. We can include some different possibilities in a lesson plan, e.g. an<br />

extra activity to use if learners take less time than expected to complete a<br />

task, and this can help if we are not sure how well parts <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> plan will work.<br />

FOLLOW-UP ACTIVITY<br />

Some <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> teacher's notes for this lesson plan are missing. Put <strong>the</strong> notes A-E<br />

in <strong>the</strong> correct places in <strong>the</strong> plan.<br />

Lesson plan headings<br />

Teacher's notes<br />

Timetable fit 1<br />

Main aim(s) 2<br />

Subsidiary aim(s)<br />

3 To listen for detail to a model story<br />

Personal aim(s) 4<br />

Assumptions<br />

5 Students can already form tenses accurately<br />

Anticipated <strong>language</strong> problems 6 Students may use present tenses<br />

Possible solution 7<br />

Procedures 8<br />

A. To enable students to use past tenses accurately and put events in order in<br />

simple narratives<br />

B. Students listen to <strong>the</strong> model story, <strong>the</strong>n in groups, plan and write <strong>the</strong>ir own<br />

stories<br />

C. Use gestures to remind students to use past tenses<br />

D. To follow on from work on past tenses and to prepare for <strong>the</strong> storytelling<br />

project<br />

E. To make sure that board writing is dear and readable<br />

REFLECTION<br />

Think about <strong>the</strong>se comments from teachers. Which do you agree with and why?<br />

1 Written lesson plans are helpful when you first start <strong>teaching</strong>, but<br />

experienced teachers don't need <strong>the</strong>m. I plan all my lessons in my head.<br />

2 Lesson plans don't help me teach because I always try to respond to<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 53


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

learners' needs during <strong>the</strong> lesson.<br />

3 Writing a lesson plan is <strong>the</strong> important thing. I always have a written plan, but<br />

<strong>of</strong>ten I don't look at it while I'm <strong>teaching</strong>.<br />

PRACTICE TASK<br />

For questions 1-7 match <strong>the</strong> stages <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson with <strong>the</strong> subsidiary aims<br />

listed A-H. There is one extra option which you do not need to use.<br />

Lesson stages<br />

1. Check vocabulary from <strong>the</strong> last lesson.<br />

2. Introduce <strong>the</strong> topic and elicit / present new words and phrases.<br />

3. Learners reorder jumbled paragraphs <strong>of</strong> a text.<br />

4. Learners match words in <strong>the</strong> text with possible meanings.<br />

5. Learners answer true or false questions.<br />

6. Learners underline examples <strong>of</strong> report speech.<br />

7. Learners exchange text and give feedback.<br />

Subsidiary<br />

A. Focus on form.<br />

B. Deducing meaning from context.<br />

C. Peer correction.<br />

D. Check detailed comprehension.<br />

E. Contextualize and pre-teach vocabulary.<br />

F. Check learners awareness <strong>of</strong> text organization (pronouns, linking, etc)<br />

G. Controlled practice <strong>of</strong> target structure.<br />

H. Revise <strong>language</strong> already learnt.<br />

Planning an individual lesson or a sequence <strong>of</strong> lessons<br />

• How do we plan an individual lesson or a sequence <strong>of</strong> lessons?<br />

When we plan an individual lesson, we need to think about its aims, <strong>the</strong> 'shape'<br />

<strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson and <strong>the</strong> kind <strong>of</strong> techniques that are most appropriate for a<br />

particular group <strong>of</strong> learners. For example, if we are introducing a new<br />

grammatical structure, we might choose a Presentation, Practice and<br />

Production (PPP) approach or a Task-based Learning (TBL) approach. Skills<br />

lessons, too, have regular shapes that we can use to organize lesson plans: for<br />

example, for receptive skills, we usually plan tasks or activities for learners to do<br />

before, while and after reading or listening; for productive skills, <strong>the</strong>re is usually<br />

an introductory stage to set <strong>the</strong> scene (i.e. to explain <strong>the</strong> context) and a<br />

feedback stage after <strong>the</strong> speaking or writing activity.<br />

We also need to think about <strong>the</strong> connections between <strong>the</strong> aims <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson<br />

and <strong>the</strong> procedures we will use to achieve those aims. The available materials,<br />

<strong>the</strong> length <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson and <strong>the</strong> information we have about our learners will all<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 54


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

help us to identify possible procedures. But <strong>the</strong> most important thing is to make<br />

sure that <strong>the</strong> materials, tasks and activities we select are <strong>the</strong> ones that will help<br />

a particular group <strong>of</strong> learners to achieve <strong>the</strong> aim we have identified.<br />

A sequence <strong>of</strong> lessons is a number <strong>of</strong> related lessons that develop <strong>language</strong><br />

knowledge and/or <strong>language</strong> skills over a period <strong>of</strong> time. Sequences may<br />

develop a single topic or <strong>language</strong> area, or may involve topics or <strong>language</strong><br />

areas that are very closely connected. Here are three examples:<br />

Structural sequence Integrated skills<br />

sequence<br />

1 revision: past simple 1 vocabulary development:<br />

2 revision: present perfect describing places<br />

3 contrast: past simple vs. (function: describing)<br />

present perfect<br />

2 reading: choosing a<br />

holiday<br />

3 writing: letter to a friend<br />

narrating holiday<br />

experiences (function:<br />

narrating)<br />

Project work<br />

1 reading and listening<br />

about free time activities<br />

2 class survey and<br />

research: sport and<br />

entertainment<br />

3 preparation <strong>of</strong> a poster<br />

display to show results <strong>of</strong><br />

survey<br />

<br />

Key Concepts<br />

Planning an individual lesson<br />

When we plan an individual lesson, we have to ask ourselves a number <strong>of</strong><br />

questions:<br />

• Will <strong>the</strong> topic be interesting and motivating for my learners?<br />

• Are <strong>the</strong> activities and <strong>teaching</strong> materials at <strong>the</strong> right level for all <strong>the</strong> learners?<br />

• Have I planned enough for <strong>the</strong> time available? Do I need any extra material?<br />

• Have I planned too much for <strong>the</strong> time available? Are <strong>the</strong>re any stages I can<br />

cut if necessary?<br />

• Have I thought about exactly how to start and end <strong>the</strong> lesson?<br />

• Does each step in <strong>the</strong> lesson help to achieve <strong>the</strong> aim?<br />

Planning a sequence <strong>of</strong> lessons<br />

Look at <strong>the</strong>se three teachers' schemes <strong>of</strong> work (i.e. outline plans) for a<br />

sequence <strong>of</strong> four lessons. What do you think might be <strong>the</strong> advantages and<br />

disadvantages <strong>of</strong> each scheme?<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 55


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Scheme A Scheme B Scheme C<br />

Week 3 Grammar Grammar revision (past Class discussion <strong>of</strong> advantages and<br />

Vocabulary tenses)<br />

disadvantages <strong>of</strong> living in <strong>the</strong> city<br />

Vocabulary (free time Revise and extend vocabulary<br />

activities)<br />

Focus on comparative and superlative adjectives<br />

Practice exercise (from and adverbs; practice exercise<br />

coursebook)<br />

Week 4 Listening Check vocabulary<br />

Reading: personal stories: students order<br />

Speaking Reading (emails)<br />

sections <strong>of</strong> text<br />

Speaking -fluency activities Focus on text organization<br />

Writing: students' own stories<br />

Peer correction (where students correct one<br />

ano<strong>the</strong>r)<br />

Week 5 Reading Quick revision: work from Listening: song -group transcription<br />

Writing Weeks 3 and 4<br />

Grammar game (snakes and ladders) to revise<br />

Listening (e.g. holiday story) work on comparatives and superlatives<br />

Grammar focus (reported Pronunciation practice: focus on /a/<br />

speech)<br />

Writing (report <strong>of</strong> story)<br />

Week 6 Test Speaking (role-play) Review <strong>of</strong> grammar and topic<br />

Feedback<br />

Group work: producing sections <strong>of</strong> tourist<br />

brochure for students' town<br />

A scheme <strong>of</strong> work helps us plan a sequence <strong>of</strong> lessons in <strong>the</strong> best way to cover<br />

<strong>the</strong> school syllabus or <strong>the</strong> units <strong>of</strong> a coursebook in <strong>the</strong> time available. It also<br />

helps us to think about what we want to achieve and what materials we might<br />

need. It also helps us to include enough variety across our lessons. Teacher<br />

and learners need dear aims beyond <strong>the</strong> single lesson and need to see how<br />

lessons are linked to each o<strong>the</strong>r. Here are some <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> main advantages and<br />

disadvantages.<br />

Scheme Advantages<br />

A Leaves teacher free to<br />

respond to learners'<br />

needs.<br />

B Quite detailed. Some<br />

sense <strong>of</strong> direction.<br />

C Very detailed. Gives very<br />

clear sense <strong>of</strong> direction.<br />

Disadvantages<br />

Gives no details <strong>of</strong> what will happen in <strong>the</strong>se lessons and<br />

so does not remind <strong>the</strong> teacher <strong>of</strong> general aims or what<br />

materials to prepare.<br />

Probably <strong>the</strong> most useful <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> three schemes <strong>of</strong> work.<br />

Not too much detail or too little, but <strong>the</strong> teacher will<br />

probably need to return to it and add more detail week by<br />

week to turn it into a set <strong>of</strong> lesson plans.<br />

Difficult to predict several weeks ahead exactly what<br />

learners' needs may be, so <strong>the</strong> teacher will need to return<br />

frequently to <strong>the</strong> scheme <strong>of</strong> work and change it if<br />

necessary.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 56


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

You can see that schemes <strong>of</strong> work are less detailed than lesson plans. Like any<br />

individual lesson, a sequence <strong>of</strong> lessons should have a logical and <strong>learning</strong>friendly<br />

progression and a good balance <strong>of</strong> approaches and activities. Like a<br />

lesson plan, a scheme <strong>of</strong> work helps us to identify our aims and make sure we<br />

choose materials and procedures that match those aims.<br />

<br />

Key concepts and <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> classroom<br />

• It's a good idea to make lesson plans look as simple as possible, so notes<br />

are better than full sentences, and <strong>the</strong>re's no need to describe every step in<br />

great detail. However, we may want to write down some important things in<br />

a complete form - for example, prompts for drilling, questions to check<br />

learners' understanding, instructions, etc.<br />

• A lesson plan should be clear and easy to read during <strong>the</strong> lesson. Different<br />

colours, boxes, underlining, etc. are useful. It is <strong>of</strong>ten helpful to include<br />

drawings <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> way <strong>the</strong> blackboard (or whiteboard) will look at different<br />

stages.<br />

• Variety is very important both in a sequence <strong>of</strong> lessons and in a single<br />

lesson. We should avoid always doing <strong>the</strong> same kinds <strong>of</strong> things in <strong>the</strong> same<br />

order, e.g. always beginning <strong>the</strong> lesson with a conversation or always<br />

ending with a role-play. There are several different ways <strong>of</strong> introducing<br />

variety into lessons. Here is a list <strong>of</strong> things we can vary:<br />

Pace<br />

quick and fast-moving or slow and reflective<br />

interaction pattern individual, pairs, groups, whole class<br />

Skill productive or receptive<br />

level <strong>of</strong> difficulty<br />

non-demanding or requiring effort and concentration<br />

Content changing from one <strong>language</strong> point to ano<strong>the</strong>r; from one<br />

subject to ano<strong>the</strong>r<br />

Mood light or serious; happy or sad; tense or relaxed<br />

exciting or calming activities 'stirring' (lively and active) or 'settling' (quietening down)<br />

• Learners may well require more frequent revision than <strong>the</strong> coursebook<br />

provides. A scheme <strong>of</strong> work is a good way to make sure that we recycle<br />

<strong>language</strong> (i.e. use it again) and include regular revision activities during a<br />

sequence <strong>of</strong> lessons.<br />

• Coursebook units are <strong>of</strong>ten arranged around a specific topic (such as sport<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 57


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

or relationships), which may be a useful way <strong>of</strong> linking toge<strong>the</strong>r a sequence<br />

<strong>of</strong> lessons. This kind <strong>of</strong> sequence gives us <strong>the</strong> chance to develop particular<br />

areas <strong>of</strong> vocabulary, but learners may feel that <strong>the</strong> lessons are repetitive, so<br />

we need plenty <strong>of</strong> variety <strong>of</strong> texts and tasks.<br />

FOLLOW-UP ACTIVITIES<br />

1 The lesson summaries 1-6 below are part <strong>of</strong> a scheme <strong>of</strong> work to introduce<br />

and practise <strong>language</strong> for describing people, clo<strong>the</strong>s and places. Complete<br />

<strong>the</strong> scheme <strong>of</strong> work with <strong>the</strong> correct summaries (A, B or C)<br />

A Project work: groups prepare poster displays (magazine photographs)<br />

Writing: descriptions <strong>of</strong> people and places (fur<strong>the</strong>r practice <strong>of</strong> functional <strong>language</strong>)<br />

B Listening: descriptions <strong>of</strong> people<br />

Present new vocabulary and check pronunciation: lexical sets for describing people<br />

(flashcards and board drawings) Writing: descriptions <strong>of</strong> students in class<br />

C Video (TV police drama): focus on descriptions <strong>of</strong> people<br />

Role-play in pairs: police interviews (practice <strong>of</strong> new <strong>language</strong>) → whole-class<br />

correction<br />

Scheme <strong>of</strong> work<br />

1 ………………………………………………………………………………………………..<br />

2 Reading: descriptions <strong>of</strong> clo<strong>the</strong>s (from teenage magazine)<br />

Vocabulary: dictionary work<br />

Writing: descriptions <strong>of</strong> people and clo<strong>the</strong>s → peer correction (pairwork)<br />

3 Vocabulary: descriptions <strong>of</strong> places and people (photographs)<br />

Practice exercises (coursebook)<br />

Speaking: describe-and-draw activity (pairwork)<br />

Writing: descriptions <strong>of</strong> places drawn in speaking activity<br />

4 Vocabulary: pictures <strong>of</strong> people, clo<strong>the</strong>s and places<br />

Grammar: comparative and superlative adjectives<br />

Practice exercises (coursebook)<br />

Speaking: general knowledge quiz (whole class)<br />

5. ………………………………………………………………………………………………..<br />

6. ………………………………………………………………………………………………..<br />

2 In <strong>the</strong> scheme <strong>of</strong> work in Activity 1,which lesson or lessons:<br />

A. has/have a variety <strong>of</strong> pace?<br />

B. use(s) different interaction patterns?<br />

C. practice (s) receptive skills?<br />

D. practice(s) productive skills?<br />

E. increase(s) <strong>the</strong> level <strong>of</strong> difficulty?<br />

F. has/have a change <strong>of</strong> topic?<br />

G. has/have a change <strong>of</strong> <strong>language</strong> focus?<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 58


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

H. is/are lively and active?<br />

I. is/are calm and quiet?<br />

REFLECTION<br />

Think about <strong>the</strong>se comments from teachers. Which do you agree with and why?<br />

1. The coursebook gives me everything I need to plan a sequence <strong>of</strong> lessons.<br />

2. If I do a scheme <strong>of</strong> work, I don't have to spend so much time <strong>planning</strong><br />

individual lessons.<br />

3. I want to respond to my learners' needs from lesson to lesson. A scheme <strong>of</strong><br />

work stops me from doing that.<br />

PRACTICE TASK<br />

For questions 1-5, look at <strong>the</strong> lessons in <strong>the</strong> project work sequence below and<br />

fill in <strong>the</strong> missing lessons from <strong>the</strong> options listed A-E.<br />

A. Some learners look for information on <strong>the</strong> internet or in <strong>the</strong> library and make<br />

notes; some plan surveys to find out information from o<strong>the</strong>rs using<br />

questionnaires.<br />

B. Groups exchange <strong>the</strong>ir work, check in and make final suggestions for<br />

editing.<br />

C. In each group learners read each o<strong>the</strong>r’s work, and make suggestions for<br />

editing.<br />

D. Groups plan <strong>the</strong>ir work and decide how to share tasks.<br />

E. Learners plan <strong>the</strong>ir writing or carry out survey interviews.<br />

Project work sequence<br />

Aim: for learners to produce a class magazine<br />

• Explain project aims; whole class decides on list <strong>of</strong> topics; form interest<br />

groups.<br />

1. ………………………………………………………………………………………<br />

2. ………………………………………………………………………………………<br />

3. ………………………………………………………………………………………<br />

• Learners write <strong>the</strong>ir first drafts.<br />

4. ………………………………………………………………………………………<br />

5. ………………………………………………………………………………………<br />

• Make copies <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> magazine for o<strong>the</strong>r classes to read.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 59


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Presentation techniques and introductory activities<br />

What are presentation techniques and introductory activities?<br />

Presentation techniques are ways used by <strong>the</strong> teacher to present (introduce to<br />

learners for <strong>the</strong> first time) new <strong>language</strong> such as vocabulary, grammatical<br />

structures and pronunciation. Introductory activities are those used by a teacher<br />

to introduce a lesson or <strong>teaching</strong> topic.<br />

KEY CONCEPTS<br />

Look at <strong>the</strong> presentation stages (<strong>the</strong> areas that are shaded) in <strong>the</strong>se<br />

descriptions <strong>of</strong> two lessons for elementary-level secondary-school students.<br />

How are <strong>the</strong> stages different?<br />

Presentation, Practice and Production<br />

(PPP) lesson<br />

Aim: students learn <strong>the</strong> difference<br />

between countable and un countable<br />

nouns, and when to use o and some with<br />

<strong>the</strong>m.<br />

Procedure:<br />

1 Ask students what food and drink <strong>the</strong>y<br />

like at birthday parties.<br />

1. Stick on <strong>the</strong> board magazine pictures<br />

<strong>of</strong> different party foods. (They should<br />

be a mixture <strong>of</strong> countable and un<br />

countable nouns e.g. ice cream,<br />

sandwiches, cola, fruit, bananas,<br />

chicken legs, cake, a box <strong>of</strong> sweets.)<br />

2. Ask students <strong>the</strong> names <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> food<br />

items, write <strong>the</strong> names on <strong>the</strong> board<br />

under each picture and <strong>the</strong>n do a<br />

quick choral drill on <strong>the</strong> pronunciation<br />

<strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>se words.<br />

3. Say students: ‘I’m having a birthday<br />

party this weekend. I’d like a box <strong>of</strong><br />

sweets and a cake for my party. And<br />

I’d like some ice cream, some cola<br />

and some fruit. I’d also like some<br />

sandwiches, some bananas and<br />

some chicken legs’.<br />

4. Say ‘I’d like a box <strong>of</strong> sweets’, I’d like a<br />

cake some ice cream’, etc., and ask<br />

students to repeat each sentence<br />

chorally.<br />

Task-based Learning (TBL)<br />

lesson<br />

Aim: students choose food and<br />

drinks for a birthday party.<br />

Procedure:<br />

1. Hold a discussion with <strong>the</strong><br />

students about when <strong>the</strong>ir<br />

birthdays are, what presents <strong>the</strong>y<br />

would like, what good birthday<br />

parties <strong>the</strong>y have been to and<br />

what <strong>the</strong>y like to eat and drink at<br />

birthday parties.<br />

2. Put students into small groups<br />

and give <strong>the</strong>m a worksheet with<br />

<strong>the</strong> pictures, names and prices <strong>of</strong><br />

lots <strong>of</strong> party food and drink on it.<br />

3. Tell <strong>the</strong> students to do this task:<br />

choose <strong>the</strong> food and drink <strong>the</strong>y<br />

would like for a birthday party for<br />

ten friends keeping within a price<br />

limit e g. $10.<br />

4. The students do <strong>the</strong> task while<br />

<strong>the</strong> teacher goes round <strong>the</strong> class<br />

listening and answering any<br />

questions.<br />

5. Each group tells <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r groups<br />

what decisions <strong>the</strong>y have made.<br />

6. The students ask <strong>the</strong> teacher<br />

questions about any <strong>language</strong><br />

<strong>the</strong>y needed for <strong>the</strong> task and/or<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 60


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

5. Point out to <strong>the</strong> students that you can<br />

count some nouns but you can’t<br />

count o<strong>the</strong>rs.<br />

These are called countable and un<br />

countable nouns. You use a with<br />

singular countable nouns or plural<br />

countable nouns.<br />

6. Ask <strong>the</strong> students some concept<br />

questions, e.g. ‘Which <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> food<br />

items on <strong>the</strong> board are countable/un<br />

countable/singular/plural?’<br />

7. Students do a written gap-fill<br />

exercise, filling <strong>the</strong> gaps with a or<br />

some.<br />

8. Students work in pairs with a<br />

worksheet <strong>of</strong> pictures <strong>of</strong> food and<br />

drink like for <strong>the</strong>ir party, e.g. ‘I’d like<br />

some/a……’, while <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r student<br />

takes notes. Then <strong>the</strong>y swap roles.<br />

<strong>the</strong> teacher tells <strong>the</strong> students<br />

about any <strong>language</strong> she noticed<br />

<strong>the</strong>y didn’t know while <strong>the</strong>y were<br />

doing <strong>the</strong> task, e.g. <strong>the</strong><br />

pronunciation <strong>of</strong> some food<br />

words, <strong>the</strong> grammar <strong>of</strong><br />

uncountable and countable<br />

nouns.<br />

7. Students do a written exercise<br />

on <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong>.<br />

The introductory stage <strong>of</strong> a lesson helps students to settle into <strong>the</strong> lesson and<br />

focus on its content. There are two kinds <strong>of</strong> introductory activities: warmers<br />

and lead-ins. Warmers <strong>of</strong>ten used to raise students' energy levels or to make<br />

<strong>the</strong>m feel comfortable. They are not always connected to <strong>the</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson,<br />

for example, <strong>the</strong>y could be a quiz, game or pairwork activity. Lead-ins focus<br />

on <strong>the</strong> topic or new <strong>language</strong> <strong>of</strong> tire lesson. They can also focus motivate<br />

students and make a link between <strong>the</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson and <strong>the</strong> students'<br />

own I (personalization). For example, if in one lesson students are going to<br />

read a text about Internet, ra<strong>the</strong>r than giving <strong>the</strong>m <strong>the</strong> text immediately, we<br />

could do one or more lead-in activities such as discussing with students how<br />

<strong>of</strong>ten <strong>the</strong>y use <strong>the</strong> Internet what <strong>the</strong>y use it what <strong>the</strong>ir favorite websites are,<br />

etc. Or if in ano<strong>the</strong>r lesson <strong>the</strong>y are going to listen conversation about favorite<br />

television programmes, <strong>the</strong> lead-in activities might be making a list <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir favorite<br />

television programmes and discussing <strong>the</strong>m with a partner. These activities;<br />

probably lead on to <strong>teaching</strong> relevant vocabulary for <strong>the</strong> texts and<br />

comprehension task follow.<br />

If you look back at <strong>the</strong> PPP and TBL lessons on page 61 you will see that <strong>the</strong>y<br />

too include introductory activities. Step 1 in <strong>the</strong> PPP lesson provides a lead-in to<br />

<strong>the</strong> topic, and steps 2 and 3 a lead-in for <strong>language</strong> needed for <strong>the</strong> lesson's main<br />

aim. In <strong>the</strong> TBL lesson, steps 1 and 2 are lead-ins.<br />

Key concepts and <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> classroom<br />

The two lessons on pages 61-2 show two common and different approaches to<br />

presenting <strong>language</strong> items. The lesson on <strong>the</strong> left is an example <strong>of</strong> a PPP<br />

lesson, <strong>the</strong> lesson on <strong>the</strong> right a example <strong>of</strong> a TBL lesson. There are many<br />

differences between <strong>the</strong>m.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 61


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

In <strong>the</strong> Presentation, Practice and Production (PPP) lesson<br />

− The lesson has a <strong>language</strong> aim.<br />

− The teacher first contextualises <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong>, i.e. puts it into a<br />

situation which shows what it means. (Step 1).<br />

− The teacher <strong>the</strong>n makes sure that <strong>the</strong> students remember previously studied<br />

<strong>language</strong> needed to practice <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong> by eliciting it, i.e. asking<br />

students to say <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> ra<strong>the</strong>r than giving it to <strong>the</strong>m, and by doing a<br />

choral drill (getting <strong>the</strong> students to repeat as a whole class what he/she<br />

says). (Steps 2-3)<br />

− The teacher next presents <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong> and <strong>the</strong> students just listen.<br />

(Step 4)<br />

− The students <strong>the</strong>n say sentences including <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong> in a very<br />

controlled or restricted practice activity, i.e. one in which <strong>the</strong>y can use<br />

only <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong> and without making mistakes. (Step 5)<br />

− The teacher tells students about <strong>the</strong> grammatical use <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong>.<br />

(Step 6)<br />

− The teacher asks <strong>the</strong> students concept questions, i.e. questions that check<br />

<strong>the</strong>ir understanding <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> use or meaning <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong>. (Step 7)<br />

− The students <strong>the</strong>n carry out ano<strong>the</strong>r controlled practice activity. (Step 8)<br />

− The students do less controlled or freer practice (i.e. where <strong>the</strong>y can use<br />

<strong>the</strong>ir own ideas) using <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong>. (Step 9)<br />

You can see that in a PPP lesson <strong>the</strong> teacher:<br />

1. presents new <strong>language</strong> in a context<br />

2. gets students to practice it in controlled practice activities<br />

3. asks <strong>the</strong> students to use <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong> in less controlled activities, in a<br />

communicative way.<br />

In <strong>the</strong> Task-based Learning (TBL) lesson:<br />

The aim <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson is for <strong>the</strong> students to complete a task (an activity in<br />

which students try to achieve something real, and have to communicate to<br />

do so).<br />

The teacher starts by holding a discussion on <strong>the</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson. (Step<br />

1)<br />

The teacher <strong>the</strong>n gives <strong>the</strong> students tasks to do. (Steps 2, 3, 4, 5)<br />

Then <strong>the</strong> teacher and students discuss any new or problematic <strong>language</strong><br />

<strong>the</strong>y needed for <strong>the</strong> task. (Step 6)<br />

Lastly, <strong>the</strong> students do an exercise on <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong>. (Step 7)<br />

You can see that in a TBL lesson <strong>the</strong> teacher:<br />

1. gives students tasks to do<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 62


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

2. presents new <strong>language</strong> after students have needed to use it, and only<br />

presents <strong>language</strong> that he/she or <strong>the</strong> students have identified as needed.<br />

A PPP approach to presenting new <strong>language</strong> gives students an opportunity to<br />

practise <strong>language</strong> in a safe <strong>learning</strong> environment where it is difficult to make<br />

mistakes. It can <strong>the</strong>refore be quite a confidence-building approach for students.<br />

But it makes students learn <strong>language</strong> Items <strong>the</strong>y may not be interested in or<br />

ready to learn and gives <strong>the</strong>m few opportunities to really use <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> for<br />

communication. The TBL approach, on <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r hand, allows students to find<br />

new <strong>language</strong> when <strong>the</strong>y want to, and to use <strong>language</strong> experimentally and<br />

creatively for real communication, In this way it puts second <strong>language</strong> learners<br />

in a situation which is quite similar to <strong>the</strong> one in which children learn <strong>the</strong>ir first<br />

<strong>language</strong>. Some learners may find this approach to <strong>language</strong> <strong>learning</strong> exciting<br />

and challenging. O<strong>the</strong>rs may wish for more guidance and structure to help<br />

<strong>the</strong>m.<br />

PPP and TBL are not <strong>the</strong> only ways <strong>of</strong> presenting new <strong>language</strong>. It is also<br />

possible, for example, to present new <strong>language</strong> to learners after <strong>the</strong>y have met<br />

it in a reading or listening text which is first used for comprehension. Ano<strong>the</strong>r<br />

possibility is to hold a discussion on a topic and introduce new <strong>language</strong> in <strong>the</strong><br />

context <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> discussion; ano<strong>the</strong>r one is to give learners a task that requires<br />

<strong>the</strong>m to use new <strong>language</strong>, <strong>the</strong>n after <strong>the</strong> task, present <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong> to<br />

<strong>the</strong>m and <strong>the</strong>n give <strong>the</strong>m ano<strong>the</strong>r task to practise <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong> (Testteach-test).<br />

Presenting new <strong>language</strong> involves making various choices:<br />

When to present <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong>? Before (as in PPP) or after (as in TBL)<br />

learners try to use <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong>?<br />

What and how many <strong>language</strong> items to present (new grammatical structures,<br />

new vocabulary, new lexical phrases, new functional exponents, new topics)? In<br />

PPP <strong>the</strong> teacher makes this choice; in TBL <strong>the</strong> teacher and/or <strong>the</strong> learners<br />

make <strong>the</strong> choice.<br />

What context to present <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong> in? In both TBL and PPP new<br />

<strong>language</strong> Items are presented in a meaningful context, i.e. one that shows <strong>the</strong><br />

meaning <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong>, and is personalised.<br />

What aids to use to help create <strong>the</strong> context, e.g. pictures, video, cassette, a<br />

worksheet?<br />

How to show <strong>the</strong> meaning or use <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong>, e.g. explanation,<br />

translation, presenting through a situation?<br />

What aspects <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong> to present, i.e. one, some or all <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

following:<br />

meaning/use, pronunciation, grammar, spelling?<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 63


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Introductory activities involve <strong>the</strong> teacher in selecting interesting and relevant<br />

warmers and lead-ins. The warmers make <strong>the</strong> students feel comfortable and<br />

ready for <strong>the</strong> lesson, and <strong>the</strong> lead-ins introduce <strong>the</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson and main<br />

<strong>language</strong> points needed by <strong>the</strong> learners le complete <strong>the</strong> main tasks <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

lesson. You may not always need to do warmers as learners may arrive at a<br />

lesson ready to learn.<br />

The ways you present new <strong>language</strong> or introduce lessons will depend on your<br />

learners - <strong>the</strong>ir level, interests, age, what <strong>language</strong> <strong>the</strong>y already know,<br />

weaknesses and strengths in English and <strong>learning</strong> styles. They will also depend<br />

on <strong>the</strong> resources available to you in your school and <strong>the</strong> approach to<br />

presentation used in your course book.<br />

See Unit 16 for types <strong>of</strong> activities and tasks, Unit 18 for selecting <strong>language</strong> for<br />

lesson, Units 23-25 for resources and materials useful for presentation and Unit<br />

26 for classroom functions <strong>of</strong>ten used by <strong>the</strong> teacher to present new <strong>language</strong>.<br />

FOLLOW – UP ACTIVITY<br />

Which <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>se are presentation activities?<br />

1. The teacher says two new functional exponents and asks <strong>the</strong> learners to<br />

repeat <strong>the</strong>m.'<br />

2. The learners read a newspaper article and do a comprehension task on<br />

it.<br />

3. The learners ask <strong>the</strong> teacher how to say ... in English and <strong>the</strong> teacher<br />

tells <strong>the</strong>m.<br />

4. The teacher points out to learners that in <strong>the</strong> task many <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>m<br />

mispronounced <strong>the</strong> word station. She asks <strong>the</strong>m to repeat it after her.<br />

5. The learners have a discussion.<br />

6. The learners translate a short poem into <strong>the</strong>ir own <strong>language</strong>.<br />

7. The teacher uses a picture story to create a context for introducing he<br />

and she.<br />

REFLECTION<br />

Think about <strong>the</strong>se comments from teachers. Which do you agree with and<br />

why?<br />

1. TBL is close to <strong>the</strong> way we learn new <strong>language</strong> in our first <strong>language</strong>.<br />

2. Learners prefer a PPP to a TBL approach.<br />

3. I always present new <strong>language</strong> in <strong>the</strong> same way as I was taught at school.<br />

PRACTICE TASK<br />

For questions 1-6, match <strong>the</strong> parts <strong>of</strong> a presentation stage with <strong>the</strong> names<br />

listed A-G. There is one extra option which you do not need to use.<br />

Parts <strong>of</strong> a presentation stage<br />

Names<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 64


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

1 went, carne, chose, swam, ate, thought,<br />

ran<br />

The teacher tells <strong>the</strong> learners about a<br />

wonderful holiday she went on last summer.<br />

Photos <strong>of</strong> last summer’s holiday.<br />

The teacher asks: ‘When am I talking about,<br />

<strong>the</strong> past, <strong>the</strong> present or <strong>the</strong> future?’<br />

The teacher drills pronunciation <strong>of</strong> new<br />

words.<br />

The teacher says: ‘We use <strong>the</strong> past tense<br />

to talk about actions in <strong>the</strong> past that have<br />

completely finished.’<br />

A. concept question<br />

B. aids in presentation<br />

C. context for presentation<br />

D. freer practice activity<br />

E. <strong>language</strong> selected for<br />

presentation<br />

F. controlled practice activity<br />

G. explanation <strong>of</strong> use<br />

Practice Activities and Task for Language and Skills<br />

Development<br />

What are practice activities and tasks for <strong>language</strong> and skills development?<br />

These are activities and tasks designed to give learners opportunities to<br />

practice and extend <strong>the</strong>ir use <strong>of</strong> <strong>language</strong>, such as new vocabulary, functional<br />

exponents or grammatical structures, or <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> subskills <strong>of</strong> reading, listening,<br />

speaking or writing. There are many different kinds <strong>of</strong> activities and tasks with<br />

different names and different uses.<br />

Key concepts<br />

Here are two writing activities. Can you find three <strong>teaching</strong> differences between<br />

<strong>the</strong>m?<br />

Activity 1 Activity 2<br />

Complete <strong>the</strong>se sentences about<br />

yourself with can or can 't.<br />

1 I.......... swim.<br />

2 I.......... speak Mandarin.<br />

3 I.......... play <strong>the</strong> guitar.<br />

4 I.......... use a computer<br />

5 I.......... run very fast.<br />

Write an invitation inviting your<br />

friends to your birthday party.<br />

Invite <strong>the</strong>m.<br />

Tell <strong>the</strong>m:<br />

<strong>the</strong> date<br />

<strong>the</strong> time<br />

<strong>the</strong> address <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> party.<br />

We can see that both <strong>the</strong>se activities give learners an opportunity to use<br />

<strong>language</strong>, but in different ways.<br />

Activity 1 − is a less controlled/freer<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 65


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Activity 2<br />

− is a controlled/restricted practice<br />

− activity because learners can only<br />

use<br />

certain items <strong>of</strong> <strong>language</strong><br />

− focuses on accurate use <strong>of</strong><br />

<strong>language</strong><br />

− is a gap-fill exercise.<br />

practice<br />

activity because <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

learners<br />

will use is not carefully limited or<br />

controlled<br />

− focuses on communicating a<br />

message<br />

− is a task.<br />

The same kinds <strong>of</strong> differences can also be seen in o<strong>the</strong>r activities for speaking,<br />

writing and <strong>learning</strong> new <strong>language</strong>. Drills (guided repetitions), copying words<br />

or sentences, jazz chants, dictation and reading aloud are o<strong>the</strong>r examples <strong>of</strong><br />

controlled practice activities. In freer activities <strong>the</strong> teacher or <strong>the</strong> materials do<br />

not limit <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> that learners use. Examples <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>se are: discussions;<br />

solving problems through exchanging ideas; sharing or comparing ideas,<br />

information or experiences; writing emails, stories, letters, invitations or<br />

compositions.<br />

Here are six more activities. What skill/subskill/<strong>language</strong> do <strong>the</strong>y focus on?<br />

What is <strong>the</strong> name <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> type <strong>of</strong> activity?<br />

1. Read <strong>the</strong> story. Then answer<br />

<strong>the</strong>se questions:<br />

a) How old is <strong>the</strong> girl?<br />

b) Where does she live?<br />

c) What is her friend's<br />

name?<br />

__________________________<br />

2. A. Listen to <strong>the</strong> tape and<br />

choose <strong>the</strong> best answer:<br />

The children's school is:<br />

a. near <strong>the</strong>ir house<br />

b. near <strong>the</strong> shops<br />

c. opposite <strong>the</strong> post <strong>of</strong>fice<br />

B. Now listen again. Are <strong>the</strong>se<br />

sentences true or false?<br />

a. The school is new.<br />

b. The classroom is big.<br />

c. The library has many<br />

books.<br />

__________________________<br />

3. Look at <strong>the</strong>se pictures and <strong>the</strong>n<br />

read <strong>the</strong> story. Put <strong>the</strong> pictures<br />

in <strong>the</strong> correct order. Write <strong>the</strong><br />

correct number (1-6) under each<br />

picture.<br />

4. Listen to <strong>the</strong> tape, and in pairs fill in<br />

his form:<br />

Girl’s name: ………..................<br />

Girl's address:.................................<br />

Name <strong>of</strong> girl's friend: ....................<br />

___________________________<br />

5. Work in pairs. Each <strong>of</strong> you should<br />

use one <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>se role cards.<br />

A. Your friend has a problem.<br />

Give him/her <strong>the</strong> best advice<br />

you can.<br />

B. You have a problem. You<br />

want to go to university, but<br />

you find studying very<br />

difficult. Ask your friend for<br />

advice.<br />

_____________________________<br />

6. Set into groups <strong>of</strong> four. Find out<br />

which food your friends like and<br />

dislike most. Ask: W<br />

Which food do you like most?<br />

Which food do you dislike most?<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 66


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Here are <strong>the</strong> answers to <strong>the</strong> questions above<br />

Activity Skill/subskill/<strong>language</strong> Type <strong>of</strong> activity<br />

1 Reading for specific Wh-questions (questions beginning with<br />

Information<br />

question words: e.g.<br />

2 Listening for specific<br />

Information<br />

3 Reading for detail Ordering<br />

4 Listening for specific Form filling<br />

information<br />

5 Fluency in<br />

speaking/freer<br />

practice <strong>of</strong> new<br />

<strong>language</strong><br />

which/what/how/when/why) for comprehension<br />

A. Multiple-choice questions (an activity in<br />

which you choose <strong>the</strong> best answer from<br />

three or more possible answers)<br />

B. True/False questions (an activity in which<br />

you decide whe<strong>the</strong>r statements are correct<br />

or incorrect)<br />

Role-play (an activity in which you imagine that<br />

you are someone else in a specific situation)<br />

6 Accuracy in<br />

speaking/ controlled<br />

practice <strong>of</strong> new<br />

<strong>language</strong><br />

Survey (finding out <strong>the</strong> opinions <strong>of</strong> a group on<br />

one topic)<br />

We can see that activities can differ in several ways: <strong>the</strong> skill or subskill <strong>the</strong>y<br />

focus on; what type <strong>the</strong>y are and what interaction patterns <strong>the</strong>y use. The kinds<br />

<strong>of</strong> skills or <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>the</strong> focus on and <strong>the</strong> interaction patterns <strong>the</strong>y use are<br />

not fixed. So for example, multiple -choice questions could be used for reading,<br />

listening or grammar activities and can be done individually, in pairs or in<br />

groups. Similarly, form-filling could be used for reading, listening or grammar<br />

practice, and done individually, in pairs or in groups.<br />

Activities 5 and 6 both involve learners talking to one ano<strong>the</strong>r to exchange<br />

information <strong>the</strong>y don't know. This means <strong>the</strong>y are talking in order to<br />

communicate, not just to practice <strong>language</strong>. This kind <strong>of</strong> activity in which<br />

learners information on exchange information that only one, <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>m has is<br />

called an information gap or a communicative activity.<br />

An activity may focus on accuracy or communication depending on how it is<br />

introduced t <strong>the</strong> teacher or <strong>the</strong> materials. For example, <strong>the</strong> survey above is<br />

focused on accuracy because limits <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> that learners use to ask and<br />

answer two specific questions. If <strong>the</strong> instructions for <strong>the</strong> activity were ‘Find out<br />

about your friends’ likes and dislikes in food’, this would not restrict learners'<br />

choice <strong>of</strong> <strong>language</strong> and <strong>the</strong> activity would focus on communication<br />

Key concepts and <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> classroom<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 67


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

When selecting activities for practising <strong>language</strong> or <strong>the</strong> skills <strong>of</strong> speaking or<br />

writing, we need to decide whe<strong>the</strong>r to do a controlled practice or a freer practice<br />

activity, an activity that focuses on accuracy or on communication.<br />

When choosing activities for developing skills, we need to decide which skill or<br />

subskill to focus on.<br />

Lessons usually consist <strong>of</strong> a series <strong>of</strong> linked activities. There are several<br />

different ways <strong>of</strong> linking activities in lessons. These are just some <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>m:<br />

1. PPP: Presentation controlled practice activities freer practice<br />

activities<br />

2. TBL: Discussion tasks presentation focus on form<br />

3. Skills-based lessons: Warmer and lead-in comprehension tasks<br />

post-task activities<br />

Example 1: A listening skills lesson<br />

Lead-in: discussing <strong>the</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> listening and <strong>learning</strong> any important<br />

new vocabulary Comprehension tasks: listening to <strong>the</strong> recorded<br />

conversation and answering multiple-choice gist questions about it<br />

listening to <strong>the</strong> conversation again and completing a form with specific<br />

information Post-task activities: brief discussion <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> topic <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

conversation.<br />

You can see that <strong>the</strong> comprehension activities (for listening or reading)<br />

start with focusing on more general levels <strong>of</strong> comprehension before<br />

moving on to subskills that require paying more detailed or specific<br />

attention to <strong>the</strong> text.<br />

Example 2: A topic-based lesson which develops several skills<br />

Lead-in: speaking about <strong>the</strong> topic and doing related <strong>language</strong> work<br />

Tasks: listening to recording about <strong>the</strong> topic reading a text about <strong>the</strong><br />

topic Post-task activities: discussing <strong>the</strong> topic and/or focus on <strong>the</strong><br />

<strong>language</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> topic writing a composition about <strong>the</strong> topic.<br />

FOLLOW- UP ACTIVITIES<br />

1. What do <strong>the</strong>se activities aim to develop? Put <strong>the</strong>m into <strong>the</strong> correct column.<br />

Communication<br />

Accuracy<br />

A. choral drilling <strong>of</strong> pronunciation<br />

B. role-play<br />

C. dictation<br />

D. discussions<br />

E. gap-fill exercises<br />

F. story writing<br />

G. copying words<br />

H. repeating new words<br />

I. describing pictures<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 68


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

J. <strong>learning</strong> conversations by heart<br />

K. problem solving<br />

2. Which skill (s) could <strong>the</strong>se activities be used to develop?<br />

A. story completion<br />

B. form-filling<br />

C. information gap<br />

D. true/false questions<br />

E. role-play<br />

REFLECTION<br />

Think about <strong>the</strong>se learners' comments:<br />

1. I don't like doing lots <strong>of</strong> different activities - it's confusing.<br />

2. I like doing a mixture <strong>of</strong> activities with some focusing on accuracy and<br />

some on fluency. That really helps me learn.<br />

PRACTICE TASK<br />

For questions 1-7, match <strong>the</strong> descriptions with <strong>the</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> activities listed A-H.<br />

There is one extra option which you do not need to use.<br />

Descriptions<br />

Teaching activities<br />

A. problem solving<br />

B. a role-play<br />

C. labeling<br />

D. choral drilling<br />

E. form filling<br />

F. a game<br />

G. a survey<br />

H. project work<br />

1. The teacher says a word and asks all <strong>the</strong> learners to repeat it toge<strong>the</strong>r.<br />

2. The teacher puts learners in pairs and asks one <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>m to act as a lost<br />

tourist asking <strong>the</strong> way, and <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r as a local person giving directions.<br />

3. The learners use maps to work out <strong>the</strong> best way to get from X to Y<br />

4. The learners listen to a tape and complete a timetable.<br />

5. The learners ask all <strong>the</strong>ir classmates <strong>the</strong>ir opinion about something and<br />

<strong>the</strong>n note it down.<br />

6. The learners go to <strong>the</strong> local museum, <strong>the</strong> library and <strong>the</strong> Internet to find<br />

out about dinosaurs. They <strong>the</strong>n make an exhibition <strong>of</strong> wall posters about<br />

<strong>the</strong>m.<br />

7. The learners choose names <strong>of</strong> objects from a list and write <strong>the</strong> names<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 69


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

under pictures <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> objects.<br />

Choosing assessment activities<br />

<br />

How do we choose assessment activities?<br />

Assessment means collecting information about learners' performance in order<br />

to make judgements about <strong>the</strong>ir <strong>learning</strong>. We may choose to assess, formally<br />

(through tests and examinations) or informally. We can carry out informal<br />

assessment during a lesson by monitoring (i.e. listening carefully) and<br />

observing learners while <strong>the</strong>y are doing ordinary classroom activities. Informal<br />

assessment is an important way <strong>of</strong> checking how our learners are getting on,<br />

but <strong>of</strong> course we can't assess all our learners all <strong>the</strong> time during lessons. To get<br />

more information about <strong>the</strong> progress <strong>of</strong> individual learners, we also need to<br />

carry out formal assessment (e.g. a class test).<br />

When <strong>planning</strong> assessment, we need to think first about our reasons for<br />

assessing learners. Then we can decide when and how <strong>of</strong>ten to assess <strong>the</strong>m,<br />

and choose what methods <strong>of</strong> assessment we are going to use.<br />

<br />

Key concepts<br />

What are <strong>the</strong> differences between formal and informal assessment?<br />

We ran summarise <strong>the</strong> differences between formal and informal assessment<br />

under <strong>the</strong> headings <strong>of</strong> assessment tasks, marking and purpose:<br />

Assessment<br />

tasks<br />

Marking<br />

Purpose<br />

Forma/ assessment<br />

• tests<br />

• examinations<br />

•learners receive grades (%. A-F,<br />

Pass/Fail, etc.)<br />

•to assess overall <strong>language</strong> ability<br />

(pr<strong>of</strong>iciency test)<br />

•to assess <strong>learning</strong> at <strong>the</strong> end <strong>of</strong> a<br />

course (achievement test)<br />

•to assess <strong>learning</strong> at <strong>the</strong> end <strong>of</strong> part<br />

<strong>of</strong> a course (progress test)<br />

•to decide if learners can continue to<br />

<strong>the</strong> next level<br />

Informal assessment<br />

•normal classroom <strong>teaching</strong> and<br />

<strong>learning</strong> activities<br />

•homework tasks<br />

•teacher keeps records <strong>of</strong> progress<br />

but does not give grades<br />

•feedback for <strong>the</strong> teacher (i.e. to find<br />

out how successful our <strong>teaching</strong> has<br />

been)<br />

•to help us improve our procedures<br />

or choose different materials or<br />

activities for future lessons<br />

•feedback for learners about what<br />

<strong>the</strong>y can do and what <strong>the</strong>y still need<br />

to work on<br />

<br />

Key concepts and <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> classroom<br />

Formal assessment<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 70


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

• Formal assessment can consist <strong>of</strong> tasks with single answers (e.g. multiplechoice<br />

questions, matching task, true/false questions) that are easy to<br />

mark. Objective test tasks like <strong>the</strong>se will give us information about learners'<br />

knowledge <strong>of</strong> particular <strong>language</strong> items and specific areas <strong>of</strong> <strong>language</strong> skills.<br />

Some formal assessment makes use <strong>of</strong> more real-life tasks, such as oral<br />

interviews, letters and essays, to get information about learners' general<br />

ability to use spoken and written <strong>language</strong>.<br />

• •When we prepare a class test, it is important to include a number <strong>of</strong><br />

different tasks, so that we get a good picture <strong>of</strong> our learners' strengths and<br />

weaknesses, and to test <strong>the</strong> main things we have taught.<br />

• We need to choose assessment tasks very carefully for young learners,<br />

making sure that <strong>the</strong> tasks are familiar and not too difficult or too abstract.<br />

Informal assessment<br />

• The amount <strong>of</strong> informal assessment we do depends on a number <strong>of</strong> things:<br />

− <strong>the</strong> size <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> class<br />

− <strong>the</strong> age <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> learners (informal assessment is especially useful for<br />

young learners for whom formal test tasks are <strong>of</strong>ten too abstract)<br />

− <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> knowledge or skills we want to assess<br />

− <strong>the</strong> frequency <strong>of</strong> formal tests or examinations.<br />

• It is important for learners to know that we are assessing <strong>the</strong>m, and to know<br />

how and when we are doing it.<br />

• To carry out informal assessment <strong>of</strong> productive skills in larger classes, we<br />

probably need to assess small numbers <strong>of</strong> learners in different lessons. We<br />

can record our opinions on a record sheet or fill in a check list.<br />

• We can carry out informal assessment <strong>of</strong> receptive skills by checking<br />

learners' answers to reading or listening tasks, and taking notes on <strong>the</strong>ir<br />

performance.<br />

• We can make separate assessments <strong>of</strong> learners' grammatical and lexical<br />

knowledge by using <strong>language</strong> games or quizzes, or by monitoring practice<br />

activities and making a note <strong>of</strong> frequent errors. We can <strong>the</strong>n give feedback<br />

to individuals or to <strong>the</strong> whole class, or return to <strong>the</strong> problems later in a<br />

revision lesson.<br />

• We may also wish to assess o<strong>the</strong>r things such as motivation and effort. We<br />

can do this by observation and also by talking to learners about <strong>the</strong>ir<br />

<strong>learning</strong>.<br />

• It is important to keep records <strong>of</strong> informal assessment, especially in larger<br />

classes, so that we have <strong>the</strong> information we need to report or give feedback<br />

on our learners' progress. These records can be quite simple, with headings<br />

for, e.g. grammar, vocabulary, <strong>language</strong> skills, motivation and general<br />

progress against each learner's name.<br />

• We need to plan informal assessment in <strong>the</strong> same way as we plan our<br />

<strong>teaching</strong>.<br />

Formal and informal assessment<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 71


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

• We may use some <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> same methods for both formal and informal<br />

assessment (e.g. assessing learners' spoken <strong>language</strong> in an interview). In<br />

<strong>the</strong> case <strong>of</strong> productive skills, whe<strong>the</strong>r <strong>the</strong> assessment is formal or informal,<br />

we need to judge learners' performance against clear descriptions <strong>of</strong><br />

different levels <strong>of</strong> skill. These may be general descriptions <strong>of</strong> speaking or<br />

writing, or <strong>the</strong>y may give separate descriptions <strong>of</strong> different subskills. Here<br />

are two examples for speaking. They are designed to assess a wide range<br />

<strong>of</strong> ability.<br />

Example 1<br />

5 Speaks very well-very few errors.<br />

4 Speaks quite well - some errors, but message is always dear.<br />

3 Has some difficulties in speaking - frequent errors and not always dear.<br />

2 Has serious problems in speaking - only very limited ability to communicate.<br />

1 Almost unable to communicate.<br />

Example 2<br />

Accuracy Fluency Pronunciation<br />

5 Grammatical and lexical<br />

accuracy extremely high.<br />

4 Quite accurate; some errors,<br />

but meaning is always clear.<br />

3 Frequent errors; meaning is<br />

not always clear.<br />

2 Very frequent errors;<br />

difficulty in making meaning<br />

clear.<br />

Speaks fluently without<br />

hesitation or searching for<br />

words.<br />

Some hesitation and<br />

sometimes has to search<br />

for words.<br />

Quite hesitant; limited range<br />

<strong>of</strong> vocabulary and<br />

structures.<br />

Extremely hesitant; very<br />

limited range <strong>of</strong> <strong>language</strong><br />

available.<br />

1 Almost unable to communicate.<br />

Very clear; stress and<br />

intonation help to make<br />

meaning clear.<br />

Generally clear;<br />

reasonable control <strong>of</strong><br />

stress and intonation.<br />

Frequent errors; not<br />

always clear enough to<br />

understand.<br />

Very frequent errors; <strong>of</strong>ten<br />

very difficult to understand.<br />

FOLLOW-UP ACTIVITY<br />

Read <strong>the</strong> following statements and decide whe<strong>the</strong>r <strong>the</strong>y are true (T) or false (F).<br />

1. We can use homework tasks for informal assessment.<br />

2. Objective tests have many different possible answers, and this makes <strong>the</strong>m<br />

difficult to mark.<br />

3. In <strong>the</strong> best formal tests learners should only have to do a few different tasks.<br />

4. It's important for learners to know when we are assessing <strong>the</strong>m informally.<br />

5. We can sometimes use games and quizzes for informal assessment.<br />

6. The methods we use for formal assessment are always different from those<br />

we use for informal assessment.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 72


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

REFLECTION<br />

Think about <strong>the</strong>se comments from teachers. Which do you agree with and why?<br />

1. I don't have time for informal assessment. I'm far too busy <strong>teaching</strong>.<br />

2. Most <strong>of</strong> my assessment is informal. It's much better than formal testing as a<br />

way <strong>of</strong> finding out what my learners can do.<br />

3. My learners have regular tests, so I don't need to do much informal<br />

assessment.<br />

PRACTICE TASK<br />

For questions 1-7, match <strong>the</strong> instructions for <strong>the</strong> assessment tasks with <strong>the</strong><br />

assessment aims listed A-H.<br />

There is one extra option which you do not need to use.<br />

Assessment aims<br />

A. To assess oral fluency<br />

B. To assess accurate pronunciation<br />

C. To check knowledge <strong>of</strong> vocabulary<br />

D. To check grammatical knowledge<br />

E. To assess writing skills<br />

F. To check awareness <strong>of</strong> stress<br />

G. To check knowledge <strong>of</strong> functional<br />

exponents<br />

H. To assess gist reading skills.<br />

Instructions for assessment tasks<br />

1. Use <strong>the</strong> notes to make complete sentences. Put <strong>the</strong> verbs into <strong>the</strong><br />

correct form.<br />

2. Choose <strong>the</strong> correct heading for each paragraph<br />

3. Reply to <strong>the</strong> advertisement; explain why you are <strong>the</strong> best person for <strong>the</strong><br />

job.<br />

4. Find <strong>the</strong> words in <strong>the</strong> text which mach <strong>the</strong> following definition.<br />

5. Discuss <strong>the</strong> problem with your partner and try to find <strong>the</strong> solution.<br />

6. Choose <strong>the</strong> most appropriate response for each <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> following<br />

situations.<br />

7. Listen and underline <strong>the</strong> word that <strong>the</strong> speaker says most strongly.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 73


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Second stage<br />

Contents<br />

Selection and use <strong>of</strong> resources and materials<br />

Selection and use <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> course book materials<br />

Selection and use <strong>of</strong> supplementary materials and activities<br />

Selection and use <strong>of</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> aids<br />

Managing <strong>the</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> and <strong>learning</strong> <strong>process</strong><br />

Identifying <strong>the</strong> functions <strong>of</strong> learner’s <strong>language</strong><br />

Categorizing learners' mistakes<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 74


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

SELECTION AND USE OF RESOURCES AND<br />

MATERIALS<br />

Unit 5 Consulting reference resources to help in lesson preparation<br />

<br />

How do we consult reference resources?<br />

Reference resources are all <strong>the</strong> sources <strong>of</strong> information about <strong>language</strong> and<br />

about <strong>teaching</strong> that we can refer to for help in lesson preparation. They include<br />

reference materials, such as dictionaries and grammar books, books and<br />

articles about methodology in teachers' magazines, <strong>the</strong> teacher's book<br />

accompanying a coursebook that contains answers and <strong>teaching</strong> ideas, and<br />

websites on <strong>the</strong> Internet. Reference resources may also include people, for<br />

example, <strong>the</strong> Head <strong>of</strong> Department or colleagues who teach foreign <strong>language</strong>s<br />

or o<strong>the</strong>r subjects. We consult reference resources by knowing where we can<br />

find <strong>the</strong> information we need and how to find it.<br />

Key concepts<br />

List as many reasons as you can think <strong>of</strong> for making use <strong>of</strong> reference<br />

resources.<br />

When we are <strong>planning</strong> a lesson, <strong>the</strong>re are many reasons for using reference<br />

resources. Some <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> main ones are as follows:<br />

Checking <strong>the</strong> form and use <strong>of</strong> grammatical structures<br />

Some grammar books are written for teachers, with very detailed explanations.<br />

O<strong>the</strong>rs, designed for learners at different levels, use simpler <strong>language</strong> to give<br />

essential information about grammatical structures. Grammar books for<br />

learners can help us to see what information our learners need about<br />

grammatical structures and can provide us with suitable ways <strong>of</strong> describing or<br />

explaining grammar. The easiest books to use are those organised in<br />

alphabetical order, or which have a detailed index or table <strong>of</strong> contents. Some<br />

grammar books also include practice exercises, which teachers (and learners)<br />

<strong>of</strong>ten find useful.<br />

Checking <strong>the</strong> spelling, pronunciation and use <strong>of</strong> lexical items<br />

The most useful dictionaries for teachers to use <strong>the</strong>mselves are advanced<br />

learners' dictionaries, which include example sentences, as well as information<br />

about <strong>the</strong> form and use <strong>of</strong> words. Most <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>se are also available on CD-ROM<br />

and online on publishers' websites. Bilingual dictionaries (which explain <strong>the</strong><br />

meanings <strong>of</strong> words in <strong>the</strong> learner's own <strong>language</strong>), including electronic<br />

dictionaries, are useful when learners are looking for a word that <strong>the</strong>y don't<br />

know in English. But <strong>the</strong>se dictionaries usually give very little information about<br />

how to use a word, so it's a good idea for learners to check <strong>the</strong> words <strong>the</strong>y find<br />

in a monolingual dictionary (i.e. one that explains <strong>the</strong> meanings <strong>of</strong> words in<br />

<strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> learners are <strong>learning</strong>). Learner dictionaries, like learner grammar<br />

books, can help teachers to find <strong>the</strong> most suitable ways <strong>of</strong> defining words and<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 75


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

giving examples <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir use.<br />

Developing your own understanding <strong>of</strong> <strong>language</strong><br />

There are a number <strong>of</strong> books for teachers which aim to increase our <strong>language</strong><br />

awareness (our understanding <strong>of</strong> how <strong>language</strong> works) and our awareness <strong>of</strong><br />

how to teach <strong>language</strong>. They <strong>of</strong>ten include tasks that we can do by ourselves<br />

or with a colleague and detailed explanations and comments as well as<br />

answers.<br />

Anticipating learners’ difficulties<br />

Reference materials about learners' errors can help us anticipate particular<br />

<strong>language</strong> problems that our learners might have. Many difficulties with<br />

vocabulary or grammar are <strong>the</strong> result <strong>of</strong> interference from LI. Books or articles<br />

about specific differences between <strong>the</strong> learner's LI and English can help to<br />

explain <strong>the</strong>se problems.<br />

Looking for new approaches to <strong>teaching</strong> lessons and new classroom<br />

activities<br />

If we are looking for new approaches or activities, or if we want to give our<br />

learners something different from <strong>the</strong>ir coursebook, <strong>the</strong>re is a wide range <strong>of</strong><br />

supplementary materials (i.e. materials you can use in addition to or instead<br />

<strong>of</strong> your coursebook), focusing on grammar, vocabulary and particular skills.<br />

There are also very many teacher's resource books with ideas and materials for<br />

all kinds <strong>of</strong> lessons. Some <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>se provide a wide range <strong>of</strong> activities for extra<br />

grammar or communicative practice, for example, while o<strong>the</strong>rs focus on a<br />

particular type <strong>of</strong> classroom activity, such as dictation or storytelling. Most <strong>of</strong><br />

<strong>the</strong>se books have very dear indexes, giving information about timing,<br />

preparation, level, etc. There is also a growing number <strong>of</strong> free websites with<br />

articles for teachers on different <strong>teaching</strong> topics.<br />

Finding out how to use <strong>the</strong> material in your coursebook<br />

Teacher's books provide suggestions about how to use <strong>the</strong> material in <strong>the</strong><br />

coursebook. Even if <strong>the</strong> lesson <strong>planning</strong> ideas in <strong>the</strong> teacher's book do not suit<br />

a particular <strong>teaching</strong> situation, it is still useful to look at <strong>the</strong>se suggestions, as it<br />

may be possible to adapt <strong>the</strong>m. Some teacher's books include different possible<br />

ways <strong>of</strong> <strong>planning</strong> a lesson, as well as explanations <strong>of</strong> answers to exercises and<br />

extra resources (i.e. things teachers can use to support <strong>the</strong>ir <strong>teaching</strong> in <strong>the</strong><br />

classroom), such as homework tasks and activities for fur<strong>the</strong>r practice.<br />

Getting advice about particular lessons or <strong>teaching</strong> materials<br />

Colleagues who have taught at <strong>the</strong> same level or used <strong>the</strong> same <strong>teaching</strong><br />

materials may be able to <strong>of</strong>fer useful advice. As with <strong>the</strong> suggestions in<br />

teacher's books, a colleague's approach may not suit us, but may help us to<br />

think about our own <strong>planning</strong>.<br />

<br />

<br />

Key concepts and <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> classroom<br />

Some grammar books and dictionaries may contain dearer explanations or<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 76


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

examples. So when checking a <strong>language</strong> item, we should try to look at more<br />

than one reference resource.<br />

Language changes, as new words appear and people stop using some older<br />

words. Grammatical usage, too, changes slowly over time. One way to keep<br />

up to date is to use <strong>the</strong> most recently published grammar books and<br />

dictionaries.<br />

Dictionaries on CD-ROM have many extra features, such as practice<br />

activities,<br />

We can learn a great deal from o<strong>the</strong>r teachers' experiences. Many teachers'<br />

magazines include regular articles by teachers describing successful<br />

lessons <strong>the</strong>y have taught. It may be easier to visit websites than to find <strong>the</strong><br />

books and articles we need. There are many sites on <strong>the</strong> Internet where we<br />

can find free resources such as lesson plans, worksheets (pages with tasks<br />

and exercises on <strong>the</strong>m that a teacher gives to learners during a lesson) and<br />

ideas for <strong>teaching</strong>. Some sites also <strong>of</strong>fer simple programs for making<br />

classroom resources, such as crosswords and gap-fill exercises. The best<br />

way to find <strong>the</strong>se materials is to visit one <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> sites that has lists <strong>of</strong> links to<br />

useful <strong>teaching</strong> resources on <strong>the</strong> Internet.<br />

FOLLOW-UP ACTIVITY<br />

Try to find resources 1-10 below. Then decide which type <strong>of</strong> resource (A-D)<br />

<strong>the</strong>y are.<br />

1. A-Z <strong>of</strong> English Grammar and Usage by Ge<strong>of</strong>frey Leech, Pearson<br />

Education Ltd 2001<br />

2. Cambridge Learner's Dictionary, Cambridge University Press 2001<br />

3. Discussions That Work by Penny Ur, Cambridge University Press 1981<br />

4. Planning from Lesson to Lesson by Tessa Woodward and Seth<br />

Lindstromberg, Pearson Education Ltd 1995<br />

5. http://wwwruthvilmi.net/hut/LangHelp/Grarnmar<br />

6. Working with Words by Ruth Gairns and Stuart Redman, Cambridge<br />

University Press 1986<br />

7. http://www.preschookainbow.org<br />

8. Motivating High-Level Learners by David Cranmer, Pearson Education<br />

Ltd 1996<br />

9. Five-Minute Activities by Penny Ur and Andrew Wright, Cambridge<br />

University Press 1992.<br />

10. http://www.puzzlemaker.com<br />

A. Language reference resources<br />

B. ideas for <strong>planning</strong> lessons<br />

C. resources for teachers and learners producing <strong>the</strong>ir own materials<br />

D. materials for very young learners<br />

REFLECTION<br />

1 What were <strong>the</strong> reference resources you used when you were studying<br />

English? Do <strong>the</strong>y still help you?<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 77


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

2 What are <strong>the</strong> reference resources you use most <strong>of</strong>ten when preparing<br />

lessons? In what ways do <strong>the</strong>y help you?<br />

3 If you had to go and teach in a place with very few resources, which three<br />

reference books would you take with you?<br />

PRACTICE TASK<br />

For questions 1-7, match <strong>the</strong> teachers’ descriptions with <strong>the</strong> reference<br />

resources listed A-H. There is one extra option which you do not need to use.<br />

Reference resources<br />

A. A <strong>language</strong> awareness book for teachers<br />

B. A book to help teachers use one kind <strong>of</strong> resource<br />

C. A teachers’ magazine on <strong>the</strong> internet<br />

D. A picture dictionary<br />

E. A learner’s grammar book<br />

F. A monolingual dictionary<br />

G. A book about interference from different first<br />

<strong>language</strong>s<br />

H. A bilingual dictionary<br />

Teacher’s descriptions<br />

1. Sometimes I just need to check what a word means in my own <strong>language</strong><br />

2. If you teach beginners all <strong>the</strong> time, it’s good to have a book that helps up<br />

your own <strong>language</strong> level.<br />

3. I want my learners to read English definitions <strong>of</strong> English words.<br />

4. It gives me information about rules and usage, written in <strong>language</strong> I can use<br />

in <strong>the</strong> classroom, and <strong>the</strong>re are exercises for learners, too.<br />

5. My school has just got some new computers, and this book gives me <strong>the</strong><br />

ideas I need about how to use <strong>the</strong>m.<br />

6. My young learners find it easier to remember new words if <strong>the</strong>y can see<br />

what things look like.<br />

7. It has articles by teachers, lesson plans and worksheets you can print out<br />

and lots <strong>of</strong> useful links.<br />

Selection and use <strong>of</strong> coursebook materials<br />

<br />

How do we select and use coursebook materials?<br />

Coursebook materials are all <strong>the</strong> materials in a coursebook package that we<br />

use in <strong>the</strong> classroom to present and practise <strong>language</strong>, and to develop<br />

learners' <strong>language</strong> skills.<br />

A coursebook package usually includes a student's book, a teacher's book and<br />

audio and/or video recordings. The teacher's book <strong>of</strong>ten includes <strong>the</strong> tapescript<br />

(i.e. <strong>the</strong> words learners hear) <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>se recordings. Often <strong>the</strong>re is also a<br />

workbook or activity book (a book with extra practice material), and <strong>the</strong>re may<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 78


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

also be a CD-ROM or extra material on a website.<br />

Teachers <strong>of</strong>ten base <strong>the</strong>ir selection <strong>of</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> materials (coursebook or<br />

supplementary) on a 'needs analysis', i.e. a study <strong>of</strong> learners' level, <strong>language</strong><br />

needs and interests, using questionnaires, interviews or diagnostic tests. This<br />

information helps to build up a class pr<strong>of</strong>ile (a description <strong>of</strong> all <strong>the</strong> learners in<br />

<strong>the</strong> class) and shows what <strong>the</strong>y have in common and how <strong>the</strong>y differ from each<br />

o<strong>the</strong>r. The teacher's task is <strong>the</strong>n to select <strong>the</strong> material that best matches this<br />

pr<strong>of</strong>ile.<br />

Key concepts<br />

What questions should we ask when selecting <strong>teaching</strong> materials?<br />

We may not be able to choose our coursebook, but we can still make choices<br />

about what materials in it to use. Decisions about whe<strong>the</strong>r - and how - to use<br />

<strong>the</strong> coursebook or part <strong>of</strong> it will depend on <strong>the</strong> answers to a number <strong>of</strong><br />

questions:<br />

• Is <strong>the</strong> material visually attractive? Is it visually dear (e.g. using different<br />

colours, different fonts, headings, etc.)? Does <strong>the</strong> visual material help<br />

learners to understand context and meaning?<br />

• Is it well organised? Can you and your learners follow <strong>the</strong> 'logic' <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

material and find your way around <strong>the</strong> page or <strong>the</strong> unit quickly and easily?<br />

• Is it culturally appropriate? Will <strong>the</strong> context(s) be familiar to learners?<br />

• Is it suitable for your learners' age and <strong>the</strong>ir needs and interests?<br />

• Will <strong>the</strong> topics be motivating to suit <strong>the</strong> age, gender, experience and<br />

personal interests <strong>of</strong> your learners?<br />

• •Is it at <strong>the</strong> right level? Does it provide a clear enough context and/or<br />

explanations for learners to understand new <strong>language</strong>?<br />

• Does it give learners enough opportunities to use <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong>?<br />

If <strong>the</strong> answer to any <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>se questions is 'No', <strong>the</strong>n we have two choices:<br />

• to replace <strong>the</strong> coursebook material with materials with <strong>the</strong> same focus/aim<br />

from ano<strong>the</strong>r book or resource, such as a teachers' website or<br />

supplementary materials<br />

• to adapt <strong>the</strong> coursebook material, i.e. change it in some way to make it<br />

suitable for our learners.<br />

There are a number <strong>of</strong> ways to adapt material that is not suitable for a particular<br />

<strong>teaching</strong> situation. Here are some ideas:<br />

Strategies Problems Possible solutions<br />

Extending<br />

material<br />

Shortening<br />

material<br />

•The task or exercise is too short.<br />

•The learners need more practice.<br />

•The task or exercise is too long.<br />

•The learners don't need so much<br />

practice.<br />

.<br />

•Write extra items, following <strong>the</strong> same<br />

pattern.<br />

•Use as much as you need, but do<br />

not feel you have to use it all. •Give<br />

different parts <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> text or task to<br />

different learners.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 79


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Changing <strong>the</strong><br />

form <strong>of</strong> tasks<br />

Changing <strong>the</strong><br />

level <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

material<br />

Reordering<br />

material<br />

Making use <strong>of</strong><br />

all <strong>the</strong><br />

resources in <strong>the</strong><br />

book<br />

• The task doesn't suit <strong>the</strong> learners'<br />

<strong>learning</strong> style.<br />

• You want a change <strong>of</strong> pace.<br />

• The coursebook <strong>of</strong>ten repeats <strong>the</strong><br />

same kind <strong>of</strong> task<br />

•The texts or tasks are too easy or<br />

too difficult.<br />

•The activities in <strong>the</strong> units in <strong>the</strong><br />

book always follow <strong>the</strong> same<br />

sequence.<br />

•The learners need to learn or<br />

practise things in a different order.<br />

•There is not enough practice<br />

material in a particular unit.<br />

•The learners need to revise<br />

particular items.<br />

•You want to preview material in a<br />

future unit.<br />

•Change <strong>the</strong> interaction pattern, e.g.<br />

use a matching task as a mingling<br />

activity (i.e. one in which learners<br />

move around <strong>the</strong> class, in this case to<br />

find <strong>the</strong>ir partners).<br />

•Make material more challenging, e.g.<br />

learners try to answer comprehension<br />

questions before reading.<br />

•Make material less challenging, e.g.<br />

break up a long text into shorter<br />

sections.<br />

•Change <strong>the</strong> order <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> material,<br />

e.g. ask learners to cover up a page<br />

or part <strong>of</strong> a page, so that <strong>the</strong>y focus<br />

on what you want <strong>the</strong>m to do first.<br />

•Use extra material from <strong>the</strong> book:<br />

grammar summaries, word lists, lists<br />

<strong>of</strong> irregular verbs, etc.<br />

•Give whole-book tasks, e.g.<br />

searching through <strong>the</strong> book for texts,<br />

pictures, <strong>language</strong> examples.<br />

Key concepts and <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> classroom<br />

• There may be good reasons for leaving out part <strong>of</strong> a unit, or even a whole<br />

unit, but remember that <strong>the</strong> coursebook is one <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> main sources <strong>of</strong><br />

<strong>learning</strong> (and revision) for our learners. So <strong>the</strong>y may find it confusing if we<br />

do this too <strong>of</strong>ten.<br />

• The coursebook will normally provide <strong>the</strong> main content for a lesson, while<br />

material that needs to be more personalised for <strong>the</strong> learners will probably<br />

come from <strong>the</strong> teacher (or from <strong>the</strong> learners <strong>the</strong>mselves). When <strong>planning</strong><br />

lessons, think about what <strong>the</strong> coursebook gives you, and what you need to<br />

add. For example:<br />

Coursebook provides:<br />

Teacher can provide<br />

additional:<br />

• situation/context • warmer<br />

• pictures • instructions<br />

• dialogues (conversations between two people) and • role-play<br />

texts<br />

• tasks and exercises • homework tasks<br />

• If we plan to reorder <strong>the</strong> material in <strong>the</strong> coursebook, we must make sure that<br />

this is possible, i.e. that a task/exercise does not depend on a previous one.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 80


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

• We can change <strong>the</strong> order <strong>of</strong> activities in <strong>the</strong> coursebook in order to introduce<br />

variety in one <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> following areas: pace, interaction pattern, sequence <strong>of</strong><br />

skills practice, level <strong>of</strong> difficulty, content, mood, etc.<br />

• We should think about how to make material more attractive and interesting<br />

for learners and how to bring material '<strong>of</strong>f <strong>the</strong> page', e.g. using mime,<br />

pictures, realia (real objects such as clo<strong>the</strong>s or food), etc.<br />

FOLLOW-UP ACTIVITIES<br />

1 Select a unit from your coursebook that you haven't used yet and answer <strong>the</strong><br />

questions.<br />

2 In what way (s) will you need to adapt <strong>the</strong> material? Make notes.<br />

REFLECTION<br />

Think about <strong>the</strong>se comments from teachers. Which do you agree with and why?<br />

1. I plan my lessons to respond to my learners' needs, so I never use a<br />

coursebook.<br />

2. I always plan my lessons following <strong>the</strong> suggestions in <strong>the</strong> teacher's book. –<br />

3. If use all <strong>the</strong> material in every unit in <strong>the</strong> order given in <strong>the</strong> book.<br />

4. I use a coursebook, but I change most <strong>of</strong> it so that learners don't get bored.<br />

5. I've got a good coursebook and I haven't got time to adapt any <strong>of</strong> it.<br />

PRACTICE TASK<br />

For questions 1-7, match <strong>the</strong> course book instruction with <strong>the</strong> activity aims listed<br />

A-H.<br />

There is one extra option which you do not need to use.<br />

Coursebook instructions.<br />

Activity aims<br />

A. Accurate use <strong>of</strong> a specific structure<br />

B. Finding collocations<br />

C. Reading for gist<br />

D. Oral fluency practice<br />

E. Finding connections in a text<br />

F. Listening for detailed information<br />

G. Writing a short story<br />

H. Listening for gist.<br />

1. Look quickly through <strong>the</strong> text and choose <strong>the</strong> picture that matches <strong>the</strong><br />

situation.<br />

2. Complete <strong>the</strong> sentences below using one <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> following modal verbs.<br />

3. Play <strong>the</strong> cassette again and answer <strong>the</strong> true/false questions.<br />

4. Underline all <strong>the</strong> pronouns and draw arrows to show <strong>the</strong> nouns <strong>the</strong>y refer<br />

to.<br />

5. Choose <strong>the</strong> words that go toge<strong>the</strong>r.<br />

6. In groups <strong>of</strong> three, discuss <strong>the</strong> problem and decide on <strong>the</strong> best solution.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 81


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

7. Look at <strong>the</strong> photographs and decide who you think is speaking.<br />

Selection and use <strong>of</strong> supplementary materials and<br />

activities<br />

<br />

How do we select and use supplementary materials and activities?<br />

Supplementary materials are books and o<strong>the</strong>r materials we can use in<br />

addition to <strong>the</strong> coursebook. They include skills development materials,<br />

grammar, vocabulary and phonology practice materials, collections <strong>of</strong><br />

communicative activities and teacher's resource materials. Supplementary<br />

materials may also come from au<strong>the</strong>ntic sources (e.g. newspaper and<br />

magazine articles, video, etc.). Some coursebook packages include<br />

supplementary materials and activities specially designed to fit <strong>the</strong> coursebook<br />

syllabus, and <strong>the</strong>re are also many websites where you can download<br />

supplementary materials. We select supplementary materials and activities first<br />

by recognising that we need something more than (or different from) <strong>the</strong><br />

material in <strong>the</strong> coursebook, and <strong>the</strong>n by knowing where to find <strong>the</strong> most<br />

appropriate kinds <strong>of</strong> material.<br />

Key concepts<br />

Make a list <strong>of</strong> all <strong>the</strong> reasons you can think <strong>of</strong> for using supplementary materials<br />

and activities. What are <strong>the</strong> advantages and disadvantages <strong>of</strong> using <strong>the</strong><br />

supplementary materials in <strong>the</strong> box below?<br />

• a class library <strong>of</strong> graded readers (storybooks that use simple <strong>language</strong>)<br />

• skills practice books<br />

• teacher's resource books<br />

• websites<br />

• videos<br />

• <strong>language</strong> practice books (grammar/vocabulary/phonology)<br />

• electronic materials (CD-ROMs, computer programs)<br />

• games<br />

There are various reasons why we might want to use supplementary materials<br />

and activities. Some <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> main reasons are as follows:<br />

• to replace unsuitable material in <strong>the</strong> coursebook<br />

• to fill gaps in <strong>the</strong> coursebook<br />

• to provide suitable material for learners' particular needs and interests e to<br />

give learners extra <strong>language</strong> or skills practice<br />

• to add variety to our <strong>teaching</strong>.<br />

Coursebooks are organised according to a syllabus, and <strong>the</strong>y are <strong>of</strong>ten carefully<br />

graded (i.e. grammatical structures, vocabulary, skills, etc. are presented in a<br />

helpful sequence for <strong>learning</strong>), so that learners' knowledge <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong><br />

[Escribir texto] Página 82


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

builds up step by step through <strong>the</strong> book. Supplementary materials and activities<br />

can provide variety in lessons and useful extra practice, but it is important to<br />

make sure that <strong>the</strong>y fit into <strong>the</strong> learners' programme, are suitable for <strong>the</strong> class<br />

and match <strong>the</strong> aims for particular lessons. Here are some <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> .possible<br />

advantages and disadvantages <strong>of</strong> different kinds <strong>of</strong> supplementary materials:<br />

Possible advantages<br />

Possible disadvantages<br />

Class library <strong>of</strong> readers<br />

• encourages extensive<br />

reading<br />

• gives learners confidence<br />

• <strong>language</strong> sometimes too<br />

simple<br />

• may not be challenging<br />

Skills practice books • focus on individual skills • may not fit coursebook<br />

Teacher's resource books • new ideas for lessons • may not suit lesson aims<br />

Websites<br />

Video<br />

Language practice books<br />

Electronic materials<br />

• variety <strong>of</strong> lesson plans,<br />

<strong>teaching</strong> materials, o<strong>the</strong>r<br />

resources<br />

• provides visual context<br />

•source <strong>of</strong> cultural information<br />

• shows body <strong>language</strong><br />

• extra practice • learners can<br />

work alone without teacher's<br />

help<br />

• motivation<br />

• familiar technology for<br />

learners<br />

• sometimes difficult to find <strong>the</strong><br />

right material for <strong>the</strong> learners<br />

• equipment may not always be<br />

available<br />

• <strong>language</strong> may not be graded<br />

• repetitive exercises • little or<br />

no context<br />

• difficult for teacher to control<br />

how learners are working<br />

• little or no human feedback<br />

Carries<br />

• enjoyment<br />

• <strong>language</strong> practice<br />

• may not be suitable for older<br />

learners<br />

Key concepts and <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> classroom<br />

Selection <strong>of</strong> supplementary materials and activities<br />

• Get to know what supplementary materials are available in your school. Use<br />

a questionnaire or interviews for needs analysis at <strong>the</strong> beginning <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

course to find out what you will want to add to <strong>the</strong> coursebook when you are<br />

<strong>planning</strong> your scheme <strong>of</strong> work.<br />

• Supplementary <strong>language</strong> practice materials are not always accompanied by<br />

teacher's books, and <strong>the</strong> aims <strong>of</strong> activities may not be dear. When selecting<br />

material, <strong>the</strong>refore, you need to think about exactly how it will replace or<br />

improve on material in your coursebook.<br />

• It may be useful to use au<strong>the</strong>ntic material (which is not designed for a<br />

particular level), in order to give learners <strong>the</strong> experience <strong>of</strong> working with<br />

more challenging texts and tasks.<br />

• The activities in materials designed to develop individual skills <strong>of</strong>ten include<br />

<strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r skills, e.g. learners need to read a text before <strong>the</strong>y carry out<br />

a listening task, or to do some writing as a follow-up activity after a speaking<br />

activity. When selecting materials and activities, think carefully about all <strong>the</strong><br />

skills that are required.<br />

• Many publishers produce materials for practising separate <strong>language</strong> skills at<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 83


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

different levels. Teacher's resource books, too, usually list tasks and<br />

activities according to level. Before deciding to use <strong>the</strong>se materials,<br />

however, you should check how appropriate <strong>the</strong> level is for your learners.<br />

Think about <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>the</strong>y will need to understand or to produce.<br />

Use <strong>of</strong> supplementary materials and activities<br />

• Learners get used to <strong>the</strong> methodology in <strong>the</strong>ir coursebook. If you are using<br />

supplementary materials with very different procedures, you may need to<br />

give special attention to instructions.<br />

• You can adapt many supplementary materials for use with classes at<br />

different levels. The texts used in <strong>the</strong>se materials may not be graded, but<br />

you can grade <strong>the</strong> activities by making <strong>the</strong> learners' tasks more or less<br />

challenging.<br />

• Games and extra communicative activities can provide variety and make<br />

<strong>learning</strong> fun. But you need to think about your reasons for using <strong>the</strong>m, so<br />

that your lesson still has a dear purpose. Older learners may want to know<br />

why <strong>the</strong>y are doing <strong>the</strong>se activities.<br />

FOLLOW-UP ACTIVITIES<br />

Here are ten sets <strong>of</strong> instructions for <strong>the</strong> kinds <strong>of</strong> activities you might find in a<br />

book <strong>of</strong> supplementary materials. For each one, decide:<br />

- what level(s) it is suitable for (i.e. elementary, intermediate, advanced)<br />

- what you think <strong>the</strong> aims are<br />

- what materials (if any) <strong>the</strong> teacher needs to prepare<br />

- if it focuses on particular <strong>language</strong>.<br />

1 In pairs, compare your list <strong>of</strong> ideas for<br />

staying healthy. Then agree on <strong>the</strong> six<br />

most useful ideas. Next, get toge<strong>the</strong>r<br />

with ano<strong>the</strong>r pair and decide on a group<br />

list <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> six best ideas. Put <strong>the</strong>se<br />

ideas in order according to <strong>the</strong>ir<br />

usefulness.<br />

2 Describe <strong>the</strong> picture to your partner<br />

so that s/he can draw it. When you<br />

have finished, compare your pictures<br />

and discuss <strong>the</strong> reasons for any<br />

differences.<br />

3 Send one member <strong>of</strong> your group<br />

outside <strong>the</strong> classroom to read <strong>the</strong> next<br />

sentence. He or she must remember<br />

<strong>the</strong> sentence without writing it down,<br />

<strong>the</strong>n come back and dictate <strong>the</strong><br />

sentence to <strong>the</strong> group.<br />

4 Use your dictionary to find as much<br />

information as you can about your<br />

word. Discuss with <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r students in<br />

your group how <strong>the</strong> meanings <strong>of</strong> your<br />

words are connected and <strong>the</strong>n explain<br />

<strong>the</strong> connections to <strong>the</strong> class.<br />

5 Decide which stories are true and<br />

which are false. Then choose one to tell<br />

to <strong>the</strong> rest <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> class for <strong>the</strong>m to make<br />

<strong>the</strong> same decision.<br />

6 Read <strong>the</strong> definition to <strong>the</strong> class for<br />

<strong>the</strong>m to guess <strong>the</strong> word.<br />

7 Listen to <strong>the</strong> words on <strong>the</strong> recording<br />

and check whe<strong>the</strong>r you have underlined<br />

<strong>the</strong> correct syllables.<br />

8 Correct <strong>the</strong> text so that it matches <strong>the</strong><br />

information in <strong>the</strong> picture.<br />

9 Write <strong>the</strong> next part <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> story on <strong>the</strong><br />

[Escribir texto] Página 84


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

computer. When you have finished,<br />

move to <strong>the</strong> next computer and<br />

continue <strong>the</strong> story you see on <strong>the</strong><br />

screen.<br />

10 Go to <strong>the</strong> blackboard and rub out<br />

one word in <strong>the</strong> sentence, so that <strong>the</strong><br />

words that are left on <strong>the</strong> board still<br />

form a correct sentence.<br />

REFLECTION<br />

Think about <strong>the</strong>se comments from teachers. Which do you agree with and why?<br />

1. There's more than enough material in my coursebook. I don't have time to<br />

use supplementary materials.<br />

2. My students get bored with <strong>the</strong> same book in every lesson, so I use<br />

supplementary materials as <strong>of</strong>ten as I can.<br />

3. I'd like to use supplementary materials more <strong>of</strong>ten, but I find it difficult to fit<br />

<strong>the</strong>m into my syllabus.<br />

PRACTICE TASK<br />

For questions 1-7, choose which book listed A-G could help a teacher who<br />

made <strong>the</strong> following comments.<br />

There is one extra option which you do not need to use.<br />

Books<br />

A. The internet and <strong>the</strong> Language Classroom Gavin Dudeney, Cambridge<br />

University Press<br />

B. Developing Listening Skills Shelagh Rixon, Prentice Hall<br />

C. Sounds Like This Katie Kitching, Belair Publication Ltd.<br />

D. Simple Speaking Activities Jill Hadfield and Charles Hadfield, Oxford<br />

University Press.<br />

E. Elementary Language Practice Michael Vince, Macmillan<br />

F. Literature in <strong>the</strong> Language Classroom Joanne Collie and Stephen<br />

Slater, Cambridge University Press.<br />

G. Words in Their Places: Graded Cloze Texts and Comprehension<br />

Exercises Lynn Hutchinson Hodder Arnold.<br />

Teacher’s comments<br />

1. L’ve been <strong>teaching</strong> for a long time, but I really need some fresh ideas for<br />

<strong>teaching</strong> grammar to low-level learners.<br />

2. I’m not sure how to use websites for <strong>teaching</strong> English.<br />

3. I’m looking for activities to help my teenage elementary learners develop<br />

<strong>the</strong>ir fluency, but I haven’t got time to do a lot <strong>of</strong> extra preparation.<br />

4. I’m interested in using poems and short stories in my <strong>language</strong> classes.<br />

5. I want a book that explains pronunciation and gives me some ideas<br />

about how to teach it.<br />

6. My learners need lots <strong>of</strong> extra tasks for reading practice, but I haven’t got<br />

time to search for supplementary materials at <strong>the</strong> right level<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 85


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Selection and use <strong>of</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> aids<br />

How do we select and use aids?<br />

Aids are <strong>the</strong> resources and equipment available to us in <strong>the</strong> classroom, as well<br />

as <strong>the</strong> resources we can bring into <strong>the</strong> classroom. They include cassette<br />

recorders, CD players, video recorders and overhead projectors (i.e.<br />

equipment with a light in it that can make images appear larger on a screen),<br />

visual aids (pictures that can help learners understand), realia and <strong>the</strong> teacher<br />

himself/herself! We select and use aids by thinking carefully about <strong>the</strong> main<br />

aims and <strong>the</strong> subsidiary aims <strong>of</strong> a lesson, and <strong>the</strong>n choosing <strong>the</strong> most<br />

appropriate ones.<br />

Key concepts<br />

Look at <strong>the</strong> following list <strong>of</strong> classroom equipment. What o<strong>the</strong>r <strong>teaching</strong> purposes<br />

can you think <strong>of</strong> for each item?<br />

Classroom equipment<br />

blackboard/whiteboard<br />

overhead projector (OHP)<br />

cassette recorder/CD player<br />

video recorder<br />

computer<br />

<strong>language</strong> laboratory<br />

(i.e. a room where learners can<br />

listen to recordings and record<br />

<strong>the</strong>mselves)<br />

A/Iain reaching purpose<br />

writing up planned vocabulary, grammar examples<br />

and explanations<br />

displaying prepared exercises on transparencies<br />

(plastic sheets)<br />

listening practice<br />

listening practice with added visual information<br />

grammar exercises<br />

grammar drills<br />

All <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>se aids can be used for many different purposes. Some examples <strong>of</strong><br />

<strong>the</strong>se purposes are:<br />

Blackboard/whiteboard<br />

Video recorder<br />

• writing words and ideas that come up during<br />

<strong>the</strong> lesson<br />

•drawing or displaying pictures<br />

• building up ideas in diagrams, word maps,<br />

etc.<br />

• for learners to write answers<br />

• for whole-class compositions<br />

•for information gap tasks (with one<br />

learner viewing and one just listening)<br />

•viewing without sound and guessing<br />

<strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong><br />

• pausing and predicting <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> (i.e.<br />

saying what you think is coming next)<br />

• with a camera, filming learners' performance<br />

Overhead projector<br />

•displaying results <strong>of</strong> group work<br />

• building up information by putting one<br />

transparency on top <strong>of</strong> ano<strong>the</strong>r<br />

• covering up or gradually uncovering parts <strong>of</strong><br />

<strong>the</strong> transparency<br />

• displaying pictures and diagrams on<br />

Computer<br />

• narrative building with a word <strong>process</strong>or<br />

• supplementary materials for coursebooks<br />

• online <strong>language</strong> tests<br />

• using online dictionaries<br />

• using CD-ROMs<br />

• email exchanges<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 86


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

photocopiable transparencies<br />

Cassette recorder/CD player<br />

• presenting new <strong>language</strong> in dialogues and<br />

stories<br />

• giving models for pronunciation practice<br />

• recording learners' oral performance<br />

• listening for pleasure<br />

• online communication (chatting)<br />

• online newspapers and magazines<br />

• project work using <strong>the</strong> Internet<br />

Language laboratory<br />

• pronunciation practice<br />

• extensive listening<br />

• monitoring and giving feedback to<br />

individual learners<br />

•developing speaking skills<br />

O<strong>the</strong>r aids are: realia, flashcards (cards small enough to hold up one after<br />

ano<strong>the</strong>r, with simple drawings or single words or phrases on <strong>the</strong>m), puppets<br />

(models <strong>of</strong> people or animals that you can move by putting your hand inside<br />

<strong>the</strong>m), charts -(diagrams that show information) and <strong>the</strong> teacher.<br />

What different uses can you think <strong>of</strong> for <strong>the</strong>se aids? Here are some <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> most<br />

important uses:<br />

Realia<br />

Real objects that we can easily bring into <strong>the</strong> classroom can be used to teach<br />

vocabulary, as prompts for practising grammatical structures or for building<br />

dialogues and narratives, for games and quizzes. Realia also include real texts,<br />

such as menus, timetables, leaflets, etc.<br />

Flashcards<br />

Like realia, flashcards can be used for <strong>teaching</strong> individual words or as prompts<br />

for practising grammatical structures.<br />

Puppets<br />

Puppets are an excellent resource for <strong>teaching</strong> young learners. For example,<br />

we can introduce new <strong>language</strong> in dialogues between pairs <strong>of</strong> puppets (or<br />

between one puppet and <strong>the</strong> teacher). Children can also make <strong>the</strong>ir own simple<br />

puppets.<br />

Charts<br />

We can use posters and wallcharts (drawings or graphs that can be put on <strong>the</strong><br />

wall <strong>of</strong> a classroom) to display larger, more detailed pictures, or a series <strong>of</strong><br />

pictures telling a story or showing related objects in a lexical set. A phonemic<br />

chart shows <strong>the</strong> phonemic symbols and <strong>the</strong> positions in <strong>the</strong> mouth where <strong>the</strong><br />

different sounds are made. The teacher can point at <strong>the</strong> symbols to prompt<br />

learners to correct <strong>the</strong>ir pronunciation. We can also use charts to display<br />

diagrams, prepared drawings and tables <strong>of</strong> irregular verbs, or to build up a<br />

class dictionary.<br />

The teacher<br />

The teacher can use hand gestures, facial expressions and mime (actions<br />

which express meaning without words) to elicit vocabulary items, clarify<br />

meaning and create context. We can also build up a set <strong>of</strong> signals, such as<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 87


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

finger correction, which learners recognise as prompts to correct <strong>the</strong>ir own<br />

mistakes.<br />

Key concepts and <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> classroom<br />

• It is a good idea to divide <strong>the</strong> blackboard or whiteboard into different<br />

sections for different purposes, as in this example:<br />

Reference material (e.g.<br />

key lexis, model<br />

sentences, grammar rules,<br />

etc.)<br />

Lesson materials (e.g.<br />

pictures, key grammatical<br />

structures, dialogues, etc.)<br />

at different stages <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

lesson<br />

Vocabulary notepad for<br />

noting all new words<br />

You can include diagrams like this in your lesson plan for different stages <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

lesson.<br />

Aids that you can prepare in advance, like charts, flashcards and<br />

transparencies for <strong>the</strong> overhead projector, will help you to make sure that<br />

lesson procedures match your aims. Ano<strong>the</strong>r advantage is that you can save<br />

such aids and reuse <strong>the</strong>m in future lessons.<br />

Make sure that you check any equipment before <strong>the</strong> lesson. Use <strong>the</strong><br />

counters on cassette recorders and video recorders to make a note <strong>of</strong> where<br />

recordings begin, so that you can find <strong>the</strong> place easily when you rewind.<br />

If you use computers or <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> laboratory, advance preparation is<br />

essential. You need to plan all your instructions very carefully, as well as <strong>the</strong><br />

sequence <strong>of</strong> activities for <strong>the</strong> lesson.<br />

FOLLOW –UP ACTIVITY<br />

Which aids do you think <strong>the</strong>se teachers are talking about?<br />

1. I can prepare lots <strong>of</strong> material in advance, and I don't have to make lots <strong>of</strong><br />

photocopies.<br />

2. It gives me a chance to listen to all <strong>the</strong> learners individually.<br />

3. Whenever I travel abroad, I collect all kinds <strong>of</strong> things to use in class.<br />

4. .I use <strong>the</strong>m as prompts for a dialogue with <strong>the</strong> whole class, <strong>the</strong>n give<br />

<strong>the</strong>m out to pairs so <strong>the</strong>y can practise.<br />

5. I always use one part <strong>of</strong> it as a kind <strong>of</strong> notebook for new words.<br />

6. It gives learners <strong>the</strong> most realistic kind <strong>of</strong> listening practice.<br />

7. This helps with tests, grammar and vocabulary exercises, dictionary<br />

work, research -just about everything.<br />

REFLECTION<br />

1 Think about <strong>the</strong> aids you use most <strong>of</strong>ten. What learner characteristics<br />

make some aids more successful than o<strong>the</strong>rs in different classes?<br />

2 What are <strong>the</strong> advantages and disadvantages <strong>of</strong> using technical<br />

equipment in <strong>the</strong> classroom? (For example, think about <strong>planning</strong>,<br />

motivation and technical problems.)<br />

3 Which aids are <strong>the</strong> most motivating for your learners? (For example,<br />

younger learners may learn best through playing games, while teenagers<br />

may enjoy working with computers.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 88


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

PRACTICE TASK<br />

For questions 1-7, match <strong>the</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> purposes with <strong>the</strong> aids listen A-H<br />

There is one extra option which you do not need to use.<br />

Teaching purposes<br />

AIDS<br />

A. Realia<br />

B. OHP<br />

C. Puppets<br />

D. Video<br />

E. Self-access centre<br />

F. Computer<br />

G. Phonemic chart<br />

H. Blackboard/whiteboard<br />

1. To show learners pictures or answer to tasks prepared before <strong>the</strong> lesson<br />

2. To remind learners about pronunciation<br />

3. For learners to work by <strong>the</strong>mselves and improve <strong>the</strong>ir<br />

4. To give learners listening practice with visual context<br />

5. To note down new vocabulary items throughout <strong>the</strong> lesson<br />

6. To bring small things from <strong>the</strong> world outside into <strong>the</strong> classroom<br />

7. To ask learners to find information for project work independently.<br />

MANAGING THE TEACHING AND LEARNING PROCESS<br />

PART 1 Teachers' and learners' <strong>language</strong> for <strong>the</strong> classroom<br />

How do we use <strong>language</strong> appropriately for a range <strong>of</strong> classroom functions?<br />

Using <strong>language</strong> appropriately means we use <strong>language</strong> in <strong>the</strong> classroom which<br />

best suits <strong>the</strong> learners and <strong>the</strong> situation. Classroom functions are <strong>the</strong> purposes<br />

for which teachers and learners use <strong>language</strong> in <strong>the</strong> classroom. For teachers,<br />

<strong>the</strong>se purposes include, for example, "to manage activities and <strong>learning</strong>, to<br />

explain <strong>learning</strong> points and to move smoothly from one stage <strong>of</strong> a lesson to <strong>the</strong><br />

next.<br />

Key concepts<br />

What are some common classroom functions used by <strong>the</strong> teacher? Here are<br />

some classroom functions that are <strong>of</strong>ten used by <strong>the</strong> teacher:<br />

Instructing. We give instructions (i.e. tell learners what to do) at different<br />

stages <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson, for example at <strong>the</strong> beginning <strong>of</strong> an activity. The <strong>language</strong><br />

<strong>of</strong> instructions is <strong>of</strong>ten <strong>the</strong> imperative, particularly for young learners and for<br />

beginners, as in 'Open your books at page 12'. For learners at higher levels, we<br />

might use o<strong>the</strong>r <strong>language</strong> forms,-for example: Tor this activity, you're going to<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 89


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

work in pairs<br />

Explaining. We might explain to learners how to do an activity, how to organise<br />

a project') <strong>the</strong>y are doing, <strong>the</strong> meaning <strong>of</strong> vocabulary or why a correction is<br />

needed. For example, when explaining about project work we might say: 'We'll<br />

put <strong>the</strong> project work on <strong>the</strong> walls so you need to make sure that everything is<br />

easy to read and that it looks wonderful/<br />

Narrating. Narrating is telling a story or talking about something that has<br />

happened. In <strong>the</strong> primary classroom we <strong>of</strong>ten tell stories to learners. In<br />

secondary and adult classrooms are may tell stories too, but we might more<br />

<strong>of</strong>ten talk about past experiences and things that have) happened in our lives.<br />

Eliciting. Eliciting is when we get information from our learners ra<strong>the</strong>r than<br />

giving it <strong>the</strong>m. This information can be about topics or <strong>language</strong>. For example,<br />

we can show learner a picture and ask 'What can you see in <strong>the</strong> picture?' We<br />

can also ask learners to give us gene information, e.g. what a-certain animal<br />

eats.<br />

Prompting learners. Prompting is when we say something to help learners<br />

think <strong>of</strong> ideas, or to remember a word or phrase by giving <strong>the</strong>m part <strong>of</strong> it. For<br />

example, we could say to learners at <strong>the</strong> start <strong>of</strong> a story telling activity ‘You<br />

could start <strong>the</strong> story with this picture’, or if a learner can't remember a word, we<br />

could help <strong>the</strong>m with <strong>the</strong> first sound, such as com for competition,<br />

Correcting. We can correct learners by using <strong>language</strong> to indicate where or<br />

how <strong>the</strong>y have made a mistake.<br />

Checking <strong>learning</strong>. We check <strong>learning</strong> all <strong>the</strong> time during our lessons, but we<br />

do this most <strong>of</strong>ten after we have presented new <strong>language</strong>, and at <strong>the</strong> end <strong>of</strong> a<br />

lesson to give us information for <strong>planning</strong> <strong>the</strong> next lesson(s). We can use<br />

concept questions to check learners' understanding, for example: 'Can anyone<br />

give me a sentence using this word?'<br />

Conveying <strong>the</strong> meaning <strong>of</strong> new <strong>language</strong>. When we convey meaning we<br />

show <strong>the</strong> meaning <strong>of</strong> new words or structures. We can do this in a number <strong>of</strong><br />

ways, such as bringing in realia, using mime or by asking concept questions.<br />

We may want to explain <strong>the</strong> meaning, to demonstrate it, or in some situations<br />

where <strong>the</strong> meaning is very difficult to explain in English, to translate it.<br />

Key concepts and <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> classroom<br />

The <strong>language</strong> we use in <strong>the</strong> classroom must be appropriate for <strong>the</strong> classroom<br />

function and for <strong>the</strong> level and age <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> learners. For example, we should not<br />

use <strong>language</strong> that is too formal with primary learners or <strong>language</strong> that is too<br />

babyish with older learners.<br />

We need to grade our <strong>language</strong> to suit <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> level and age <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

[Escribir texto] Página 90


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

learners. Grading <strong>language</strong> means choosing to use classroom <strong>language</strong> that is<br />

at or below <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> level <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> learners. For example, with beginners we<br />

use simple words and phrases, but with higher-level learners our <strong>language</strong> can<br />

be more complex. Grading means that our <strong>language</strong> is at <strong>the</strong> right level for <strong>the</strong><br />

learners to understand.<br />

We need to sequence our <strong>language</strong> appropriately to provide learners with<br />

<strong>learning</strong> opportunities. Sequencing means using <strong>language</strong> in a logical order.<br />

This is particularly important for explanations and instructions, for example:<br />

'Listen. Work with a partner.’ ra<strong>the</strong>r than 'Work with a partner. Listen.<br />

Learners can learn classroom <strong>language</strong>, just by hearing it again and again. So<br />

it is important to use <strong>the</strong> same classroom <strong>language</strong> for classroom functions at<br />

<strong>the</strong> early stages <strong>of</strong> <strong>learning</strong>, for example: 'Open your books and look at page<br />

....We can <strong>the</strong>n build up <strong>the</strong>se phrases to suit <strong>the</strong> learners' level and age.<br />

We need to think about <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> we are going to use for different<br />

classroom functions and make sure <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> use is appropriate <strong>language</strong><br />

will use <strong>the</strong> clear. If we do not plan or think about <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> we use, we<br />

might use <strong>the</strong> LI, or <strong>language</strong> which is too complex, which would not be helpful<br />

to <strong>learning</strong>.<br />

FOLLOW UP ACTIVITIES<br />

1. Look at <strong>the</strong> list <strong>of</strong> classroom functions in Key concepts above, and at <strong>the</strong><br />

activities carried out by a teacher below. At which stage <strong>of</strong> a lesson might<br />

you use <strong>the</strong> different classroom functions? You will find that you can use<br />

more than one classroom function at each stage.<br />

Stages <strong>of</strong> a lesson<br />

A. Presenting new vocabulary<br />

B. Telling <strong>the</strong> class a story and encouraging <strong>the</strong>m to join in<br />

C. Brainstorming ideas for a writing task with <strong>the</strong> whole class<br />

D. Monitoring learners during a controlled practice activity<br />

E. Giving feedback after a task<br />

2. Read this teacher's instructions to children on how to make a rabbit (bunny)<br />

puppet. Which <strong>language</strong> form does <strong>the</strong> teacher use for each instruction and<br />

which conjunctions does she use to sequence <strong>the</strong> instructions?<br />

Now watch me first. Take <strong>the</strong> scissors and cut. Start with <strong>the</strong> bunny's head.<br />

OK, be careful. Cut round <strong>the</strong> head and now his big ears ... his big ears that<br />

go flop, flop, flop. And up <strong>the</strong> ear and down again and round his head.<br />

Then, cut here round <strong>the</strong> bunny's face and round his shoulder and down<br />

round his body and now down to his feet.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 91


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

REFLECTION<br />

Think about <strong>the</strong>se comments from teachers. Which do you agree with and why?<br />

1. I don't need to plan <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> I use for giving instructions. I just think<br />

<strong>of</strong> what to say at <strong>the</strong> time and I know when my learners understand.<br />

2. My learners speak <strong>the</strong> same LI as I do. So it's much better to use <strong>the</strong><br />

mo<strong>the</strong>r tongue for setting up activities and checking understanding.<br />

3. I have a collection <strong>of</strong> different phrases that I use for managing my<br />

classes. I choose from <strong>the</strong>se phrases when I am <strong>planning</strong> my lessons. I<br />

teach different levels, but I find I can use <strong>the</strong> same <strong>language</strong> for each<br />

level.<br />

PRACTICE TASK<br />

For questions 1-5, look at <strong>the</strong> following situations and three possible things a<br />

teacher could say. Choose <strong>the</strong> most appropriate option A, B or C.<br />

1. In a class <strong>of</strong> primary children <strong>of</strong> 9-10 years <strong>of</strong> age, <strong>the</strong> learners are finishing<br />

a pairwork task. The teacher wants to check <strong>the</strong> answers with <strong>the</strong> class.<br />

A. What's <strong>the</strong> answer to number 1? Hands up, please.<br />

B. Can any <strong>of</strong> you possibly tell me what you think might be <strong>the</strong> answer<br />

for <strong>the</strong> first question?<br />

C. Answer?<br />

2. In a class <strong>of</strong> teenagers in <strong>the</strong>ir second year <strong>of</strong>-English, <strong>the</strong> teacher has just<br />

presented a new grammatical structure and wants to check that <strong>the</strong> learners<br />

understand <strong>the</strong> meaning.<br />

A. Does everyone understand?<br />

B. Who can give me an example sentence?<br />

C. Please explain <strong>the</strong> meaning.<br />

3. A group <strong>of</strong> businessmen are doing a discussion activity. The teacher notices<br />

a learner has made a mistake and says:<br />

A That's wrong.<br />

B A bad answer.<br />

C Is that quite right?<br />

4. In a class <strong>of</strong> adult learners <strong>of</strong> mixed levels, <strong>the</strong> teacher is giving <strong>the</strong> first<br />

instruction for a complex group activity.<br />

A. A You all know what to do so you can start.<br />

B. B First, get into <strong>the</strong> groups you were in yesterday.<br />

C. C Here's <strong>the</strong> handout for <strong>the</strong> activity. You can start.<br />

5. The teacher is telling a story to a class <strong>of</strong> very young primary learners who<br />

have only been <strong>learning</strong> English for one month.<br />

A. Here is a little boy. Look. One day ...<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 92


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

B. This is a story about a little boy who used to live in <strong>the</strong> city.<br />

C. Stories are very important for you. They will help you learn new<br />

grammar.<br />

Identifying <strong>the</strong> Functions <strong>of</strong> Learners’ Language<br />

How do we identify <strong>the</strong> functions <strong>of</strong> learners' <strong>language</strong>?<br />

The functions <strong>of</strong> learners' <strong>language</strong> are <strong>the</strong> purposes for which learners use<br />

<strong>language</strong> in <strong>the</strong> classroom. These purposes include taking part in tasks and.<br />

activities, asking questions <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> teacher, interacting with each o<strong>the</strong>r. Examples<br />

<strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> functions <strong>of</strong> learners' <strong>language</strong> are asking for clarification from <strong>the</strong><br />

teacher or o<strong>the</strong>r learners, and checking information or understanding.<br />

Key concepts<br />

Can you think <strong>of</strong> some common functions <strong>of</strong> learners' <strong>language</strong>?<br />

Read through this description <strong>of</strong> a lesson. There are examples <strong>of</strong> learners'<br />

<strong>language</strong> functions for each stage.<br />

Learners'<br />

functions<br />

Greeting<br />

<strong>language</strong><br />

Asking for clarification<br />

Checking information<br />

and understanding<br />

Saying goodbye<br />

Teacher's and /earners' actions<br />

The teacher enters <strong>the</strong> classroom and <strong>the</strong> learners say 'Good<br />

morning'. The teacher hands out a reading text and gives<br />

learners instructions for <strong>the</strong> reading task.<br />

The learners check <strong>the</strong> instructions with <strong>the</strong> teacher by asking<br />

'Can you explain that again please? What do we have to do? ’<br />

The learners complete <strong>the</strong> reading task individually. The learners<br />

check <strong>the</strong>ir answers in pairs. They say, e.g. 'What answer do you<br />

have for number 4? I doesn’t understand <strong>the</strong> meaning <strong>of</strong> this<br />

word. Do you know what it means?' The teacher checks <strong>the</strong><br />

answers.<br />

The lesson ends. The learners say 'Goodbye' to each o<strong>the</strong>r and<br />

to <strong>the</strong> teacher.<br />

Key concepts and <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> classroom<br />

Learners need a range <strong>of</strong> classroom <strong>language</strong> so that <strong>the</strong>y can interact<br />

appropriately with each o<strong>the</strong>r and with <strong>the</strong> teacher. The <strong>language</strong> that learners<br />

need for interacting with each\ o<strong>the</strong>r may sometimes be quite formal, and at<br />

o<strong>the</strong>r times more relaxed, depending on who is in <strong>the</strong> group. The <strong>language</strong> <strong>the</strong>y<br />

need for interacting with <strong>the</strong> teacher is <strong>of</strong>ten neutral or more formal.<br />

Learners need to know special words and phrases for certain games and<br />

activities. For example, It's my turn I It's your turn I I’m first I after you I I’ve won,<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 93


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

We need to teach our learners <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> for a range <strong>of</strong> learners' classroom<br />

functions. We also need to teach <strong>the</strong>m to understand <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> for a range<br />

<strong>of</strong> teacher classroom functions. This <strong>language</strong> is not usually taught in <strong>the</strong><br />

coursebook. When we plan tasks and activities we need to think about what<br />

<strong>language</strong> <strong>the</strong> learners need to do <strong>the</strong> tasks. If learners do not know how to ask<br />

for an explanation or clarification, <strong>the</strong>y will use <strong>the</strong>ir L1.<br />

FOLLOW – UP ACTIVITIES<br />

1. Here are eight examples <strong>of</strong> learner <strong>language</strong>. Which function does each one<br />

express?<br />

A. Can you say that again, please?<br />

B. I don't have <strong>the</strong> same answer.<br />

C. See you tomorrow.<br />

D. Is it paged 25 or 35?<br />

E. What do you think?<br />

F. Yes, I totally agree with you.<br />

G. Well, I think this is <strong>the</strong> best answer.<br />

H. Hi!<br />

2. Each <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> following sets <strong>of</strong> exponents A-D expresses one function <strong>of</strong><br />

learners' <strong>language</strong>, which function does each set express?<br />

A<br />

How about starting with number five?<br />

Let's do this toge<strong>the</strong>r.<br />

Why don't we ask one <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r<br />

groups?<br />

C<br />

It's great to see you again. How are<br />

you? Good morning.<br />

B<br />

Can you give an example for number<br />

4? Can I use this word to talk about<br />

myself? Does this mean <strong>the</strong> same<br />

thing?<br />

D<br />

My answer's <strong>the</strong> same as yours.<br />

Yes, that's right.<br />

That's my opinion, too.<br />

REFLECTION<br />

Think about <strong>the</strong>se comments from teachers. Which do you I agree with and<br />

why?<br />

1. I don't think learners need English for classroom functions. They can use<br />

<strong>the</strong>ir L1.<br />

2. My learners usually use <strong>the</strong>ir LI when <strong>the</strong>y work in groups and when <strong>the</strong>y<br />

ask me questions. I don't think <strong>the</strong>y know how to say <strong>the</strong>se things in<br />

English.<br />

3. I put examples <strong>of</strong> appropriate <strong>language</strong> for classroom functions on <strong>the</strong><br />

walls <strong>of</strong> my classroom to prompt my learners.<br />

PRACTICE TASK<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 94


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

For questions 1-5, look at <strong>the</strong> situations and three possible functions. Choose<br />

<strong>the</strong> correct option A, B or C.<br />

1. A learner does not hear <strong>the</strong> instructions <strong>the</strong> teacher gives. He needs to<br />

A. ask for repetition.<br />

B. express agreement.<br />

C. <strong>of</strong>fer an opinion<br />

2. A learner does not understand <strong>the</strong> meaning <strong>of</strong> a new word. She needs to:<br />

A. express doubt<br />

B. give advice<br />

C. ask for clarification<br />

3. A learner has an idea about how to begin a pairwork activity. He needs to:<br />

A. make a suggestion.<br />

B. make a comparison<br />

C. express disagreement.<br />

4. A learner thinks she has misunderstood a word. She needs to:<br />

A. give an example<br />

B. check meaning.<br />

C. ask for an opinion.<br />

5. learner wants to encourage a shy learner in group work. He needs to:<br />

A. check information<br />

B. invite him to speak<br />

C. explain his meaning<br />

Categorizing learners' mistakes<br />

• How do we categorize learners' mistakes?<br />

Mistakes show problems ei<strong>the</strong>r with accuracy, i.e. using <strong>the</strong> correct form <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

<strong>language</strong>, or with communication, i.e. sharing information dearly. Learners can<br />

make oral or written mistakes. Oral mistakes are mistakes learners make when<br />

<strong>the</strong>y are speaking. They make mistakes in <strong>the</strong> accuracy <strong>of</strong>, for example,<br />

grammar, pronunciation or vocabulary or in <strong>the</strong> degree <strong>of</strong> formality <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

<strong>language</strong> <strong>the</strong>y use. In written <strong>language</strong>, learners may make mistakes, for<br />

example, in grammar, spelling, paragraphing, ordering <strong>of</strong> information or<br />

punctuation. Learners' mistakes can be errors or slips. Learners 'are usually<br />

able to correct slips <strong>the</strong>mselves.<br />

• Key concepts<br />

Oral mistakes<br />

Look at <strong>the</strong> following examples <strong>of</strong> learners' oral mistakes. There are mistakes <strong>of</strong><br />

accuracy (grammar, pronunciation, vocabulary) and appropriacy. Can you<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 95


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

identify <strong>the</strong>m?<br />

1. She like this picture. (Talking about present habit)<br />

2. Shut up! (Said to a classmate)<br />

3. I wear my suit in <strong>the</strong> sea.<br />

4. Do you know where is <strong>the</strong> post <strong>of</strong>fice?<br />

5. The dog /biit/ me. (Talking about a dog attacking someone)<br />

6. What /haepan ‘ed/?<br />

Accuracy<br />

Examples 1, 3, 4, 5 and 6 all contain examples <strong>of</strong> inaccurate <strong>language</strong>.<br />

• In Example 1 <strong>the</strong>re is a grammar mistake. The learner has missed <strong>the</strong> third<br />

person s from <strong>the</strong> verb. The learner should have said 'She likes this picture'.<br />

• In Example 3 <strong>the</strong>re is a vocabulary mistake. The learner has used suit<br />

instead <strong>of</strong> swimsuit. The learner should have said 'I wear my swimsuit in <strong>the</strong><br />

sea'.<br />

• In Example 4 <strong>the</strong>re is a grammar mistake. The learner has put <strong>the</strong> subject<br />

and verb in <strong>the</strong> wrong order in <strong>the</strong> indirect question. The learner should have<br />

said 'Do you know where <strong>the</strong> post <strong>of</strong>fice is?'<br />

• In Example 5 <strong>the</strong>re is a pronunciation mistake. The learner has used <strong>the</strong><br />

long /ii/ sound when she should have used <strong>the</strong> short /i/ sound. The learner<br />

should have said 'The dog /bit/ me'.<br />

• In Example 6 <strong>the</strong>re is a pronunciation mistake. The learner has stressed <strong>the</strong><br />

final syllable <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> word happened, making it into a three-syllable word<br />

when it is in fact pronounced as a two-syllable word /'haepand/<br />

Appropriacy<br />

Example 2 contains an example <strong>of</strong> inappropriate <strong>language</strong>. Although Example<br />

2 is accurate, <strong>the</strong>re is a problem with appropriacy. It is rude to say 'Shut up!' in<br />

<strong>the</strong> classroom. The learner should have said 'Can you be quiet, please?', or<br />

something similar.<br />

Written mistakes<br />

As with oral mistakes, <strong>the</strong>se can also be categorised into slips or errors in<br />

accuracy or appropriacy, or errors in communication.<br />

Have a look at this story written by a learner. In <strong>the</strong> margin, <strong>the</strong>re is a code<br />

written by <strong>the</strong> teacher to show different kinds <strong>of</strong> mistakes. Can you work out<br />

what <strong>the</strong> code means?<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 96


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

My Best Friend<br />

I going to tell you about my best Friend. Her name is Betty. She is tall and has<br />

got long hair dark. Her Favourite Food is chocolate and her Favourite drink is<br />

cola. Her hobbies are writting short stories and looking at TV. At <strong>the</strong> weekend<br />

we go shopping in <strong>the</strong> mall and meet our Friends. Its Fun!<br />

The teacher has used a correction code to indicate <strong>the</strong> types <strong>of</strong> mistakes in<br />

accuracy that <strong>the</strong> learner has made. This enables learners to make <strong>the</strong>ir own<br />

corrections. Here is an explanation <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> letters and symbols:<br />

= word missing<br />

There is a word missing in <strong>the</strong> first line. The learner has written 'I<br />

going’ when it should be 'I am going'.<br />

= wrong word order<br />

There is a word order mistake in line 2. The sentence 'She is tall<br />

and has got long hair dark' should be 'She is tall and has got long<br />

dark hair'.<br />

= wrong spelling<br />

There is a spelling mistake in line 3. The word 'writting' should be<br />

'writing'.<br />

= wrong vocabulary<br />

There is a vocabulary mistake in line 4. The learner has used<br />

'looking at’ When <strong>the</strong> correct word is 'watching'.<br />

= punctuation (comma, full stop, etc.)<br />

The learner has used <strong>the</strong> wrong punctuation in line 5. The learner<br />

has written Its' when <strong>the</strong> correct version is 'It's'.<br />

O<strong>the</strong>r common categories in a correction code are:<br />

I/I = good sentence or expression<br />

|prep | = wrong preposition<br />

[A] = wrong agreement, for example She like<br />

? Ask me (I don't understand)<br />

T wrong verb tense t<br />

/ too many words<br />

It makes learners lose motivation if we correct every mistake <strong>the</strong>y make. We<br />

need to make sure our corrections are appropriate for <strong>the</strong> level and <strong>learning</strong><br />

style <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> learner and for <strong>the</strong> focus <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> task.<br />

• Key concepts and <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> classroom<br />

• There are different reasons for <strong>the</strong> mistakes that learners make. For example:<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 97


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

<strong>the</strong>y may not have learnt <strong>the</strong> word or <strong>the</strong> structure yet; <strong>the</strong>y may be using a<br />

word or structure from <strong>the</strong>ir first <strong>language</strong> by mistake; <strong>the</strong>y may have been<br />

introduced to <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> but may still need more time to <strong>process</strong> it or practise<br />

using it; <strong>the</strong>y may have great difficulty making certain sounds; <strong>the</strong>y may have<br />

writing or spelling problems in <strong>the</strong>ir first <strong>language</strong>; <strong>the</strong>y may need more time to<br />

check and edit <strong>the</strong>ir writing. The reason why a mistake is made influences <strong>the</strong><br />

way we correct it.<br />

• There are different techniques we can use to correct oral and written<br />

mistakes.<br />

• Mistakes can be a very positive aspect <strong>of</strong> <strong>learning</strong>. They show us that<br />

<strong>learning</strong> is taking place and that learners are taking risks with <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong>.<br />

FOLLOW-UP ACTIVITY<br />

Here is ano<strong>the</strong>r example <strong>of</strong> a learner's writing. Look at <strong>the</strong> underlined words and<br />

decide which symbol in <strong>the</strong> correction code you would use for each one.<br />

In <strong>the</strong> post people used, to travel on train or on -foot. Now <strong>the</strong>y usually travel<br />

by plane and, by car. I like trains. Train are very confortable and, you can to<br />

read, or talk to your •friends. Planes are -fast and, <strong>the</strong>y were more expensive.<br />

REFLECTION<br />

Think about <strong>the</strong>se comments from teachers. Which do you agree with and why?<br />

1 It's very difficult to ignore mistakes in spelling or grammar. They seem to be<br />

<strong>the</strong> most important thing so I feel I have to correct <strong>the</strong>m.<br />

2 Learners think we're not doing our job if we don't correct all <strong>the</strong>ir mistakes.<br />

3 It's easier to correct mistakes in accuracy than in communication.<br />

PRACTICE TASK<br />

For questions 1-6, match <strong>the</strong> examples <strong>of</strong> learner mistakes in written work with<br />

<strong>the</strong> types <strong>of</strong> mistake listed A-G.<br />

There is one extra option which you do not need to use.<br />

Learner mistakes<br />

4 She arrived to <strong>the</strong> station early.<br />

5 We listened <strong>the</strong> music before we went out.<br />

6 I live in very cheap accommodation near <strong>the</strong> school.<br />

7 This is a picture <strong>of</strong> my uncles sister.<br />

8 He hurt one <strong>of</strong> his foot fingers.<br />

9 He wore a coat black.<br />

Types <strong>of</strong> mistake<br />

A. wrong punctuation<br />

B. wrong spelling<br />

C. wrong word order<br />

D. wrong preposition<br />

E. word missing<br />

F. wrong agreement<br />

G. wrong vocabulary<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 98


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 99


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Third stage<br />

Contends<br />

Classroom management.<br />

Teacher roles<br />

Grouping learners<br />

Correcting learns<br />

Giving feedback<br />

Elaboration <strong>of</strong> Didactic material<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 100


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Teacher roles<br />

CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT<br />

What are teacher roles?<br />

During a lesson <strong>the</strong> teacher needs to manage <strong>the</strong> activities and <strong>the</strong> learners in<br />

<strong>the</strong> classroom in different ways. This means he or she needs to behave in<br />

different ways at different stages <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson. These different kinds <strong>of</strong><br />

behaviour are called 'teacher roles'.<br />

Key concepts<br />

Which roles does a teacher use in a lesson?<br />

Every teacher changes roles during a lesson. These roles will be appropriate to<br />

<strong>the</strong> type <strong>of</strong> lesson, activities, lesson aims and <strong>the</strong> level and age <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> learners.<br />

At different times we may, for example, act as a planner, an informer, a<br />

manager, a parent or friend, or a monitor. For example, when learners are<br />

doing a role-play, one role we have is to make sure that <strong>the</strong>y are doing what<br />

we want <strong>the</strong>m to do. This is called monitoring. When we present new <strong>language</strong><br />

to <strong>the</strong> class, our role is to inform and explain to our learners. Here are some<br />

roles teachers <strong>of</strong>ten use.<br />

Role<br />

The teacher:<br />

1 Planner prepares and thinks through <strong>the</strong> lesson in detail before <strong>teaching</strong> it so<br />

that it has variety and <strong>the</strong>re are appropriate activities for <strong>the</strong> different<br />

learners in <strong>the</strong> class.<br />

2 Informer gives <strong>the</strong> learners detailed information about <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> or about an<br />

activity.<br />

3 Manager organises <strong>the</strong> <strong>learning</strong> space, makes sure everything in <strong>the</strong> classroom is<br />

running smoothly and sets up rules and routines (i.e. things which are<br />

done regularly) for behaviour.<br />

4 Monitor goes around <strong>the</strong> class during individual, pair and group work activities,<br />

checking <strong>learning</strong>.<br />

5 Involver makes sure all <strong>the</strong> learners are taking part in <strong>the</strong> activities.<br />

6 Parent/Friend comforts learners when <strong>the</strong>y are upset or unhappy.<br />

7 Diagnostician is able to recognise <strong>the</strong> cause <strong>of</strong> learners' difficulties.<br />

8 Resource can be used by <strong>the</strong> learners for help and advice.<br />

There are certain roles that we usually use at certain stages <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson. For<br />

example, we are planners before <strong>the</strong> lesson and may be monitors during group<br />

work and pairwork activities. Sometimes we take on more than one role at <strong>the</strong><br />

same time. For example, we might monitor and explain if a pair <strong>of</strong> learners is<br />

having problems with an activity: we monitor to see how well <strong>the</strong>y are doing and<br />

we explain to help <strong>the</strong>m do better. There are various names for <strong>the</strong> different<br />

roles <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> teacher. The ones above are very common.<br />

<br />

Key concepts and <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> classroom<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 101


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

• We need to choose teacher roles which are appropriate to <strong>the</strong> age and level<br />

<strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> learners, <strong>the</strong> stage <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson and <strong>the</strong> purpose <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> activity. This<br />

means we need to think about our roles when we are <strong>planning</strong> lessons and<br />

be ready to use different roles during our lessons.<br />

• The correct choice <strong>of</strong> appropriate teacher roles will help our lessons run<br />

more smoothly and will make <strong>learning</strong> and <strong>teaching</strong> more effective.<br />

• Some roles are more suitable for young learner classes than for adult<br />

classes, e.g. parent or friend.<br />

• Our roles change at different stages <strong>of</strong> our <strong>teaching</strong>:<br />

Before <strong>the</strong> lesson<br />

- We are planners <strong>of</strong> our materials to make sure that <strong>the</strong> lesson is suitable<br />

for <strong>the</strong> learners and for <strong>the</strong> <strong>learning</strong> purpose.<br />

- We are also diagnosticians <strong>of</strong> our learners' problems.<br />

During <strong>the</strong> lesson<br />

• When we are presenting new <strong>language</strong> or new vocabulary to <strong>the</strong> learners,<br />

we are informers.<br />

• When we are setting up activities, we are managers.<br />

• When learners are doing activities, we are monitors, diagnosticians,<br />

managers and a resource.<br />

• When <strong>the</strong>re are problems with discipline, we are managers and sometimes a<br />

parent or a friend.<br />

After <strong>the</strong> lesson<br />

• When we think about how successful <strong>the</strong> lesson was, what <strong>the</strong> learners<br />

understood and were able to do and what <strong>the</strong>y had problems with, we are<br />

diagnosticians and planners. We look at our scheme <strong>of</strong> work to check if <strong>the</strong><br />

next lesson is appropriately planned.<br />

FOLLOW-UP ACTYVITY<br />

Here are some examples <strong>of</strong> teacher <strong>language</strong> at different stages <strong>of</strong> a lesson.<br />

What do you think is <strong>the</strong> teacher's role in each one?<br />

1 Teacher to a pair <strong>of</strong> learners doing pairwork: 'How are you doing? Is<br />

everything OK?'<br />

2 Teacher to <strong>the</strong> whole class: 'We add er to make <strong>the</strong> comparative form <strong>of</strong><br />

one-syllable adjectives.'<br />

3 Teacher to a young learner: 'Does your finger hurt? Let me have a look.'<br />

4 Teacher to <strong>the</strong> whole class: 'Right, everyone stand up and turn to face your<br />

partner.'<br />

5 Teacher to <strong>the</strong> whole class: 'I think I know why you are having problems.'<br />

REFLECTION<br />

Think about <strong>the</strong>se comments from teachers. Which do you agree with and why?<br />

1 I like my class to be organised and I like to be in control. I think my main<br />

roles are to inform and manage. That's what <strong>the</strong> learners want.<br />

2 I believe that my role is to enable <strong>the</strong> learners to learn for <strong>the</strong>mselves, so I<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 102


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

involve everyone and try not to control <strong>the</strong> learners and <strong>the</strong> activities too<br />

much.<br />

3 I teach young children. Most <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> time I am more a parent than a teacher.<br />

But, in my opinion, <strong>the</strong> most important teacher roles are <strong>planning</strong> and<br />

organising, especially with children.<br />

PRACTICE TASK<br />

For questions 1-5, match <strong>the</strong> descriptions <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> teacher’s roles with <strong>the</strong> roles<br />

listed A-F.<br />

There is one extra option which you do not need to use.<br />

ROLES<br />

A. An informer<br />

B. A monitor<br />

C. A diagnostician<br />

D. An involver<br />

E. A planner<br />

F. A manager<br />

Descriptions <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> teacher´s roles<br />

1. Before <strong>the</strong> lesson, she is ……..when she thinks about and prepares what<br />

she is going to teach.<br />

2. She is ………….when she presents new <strong>language</strong> to learners.<br />

3. She is…………..when she organises group work or pairwork activities<br />

4. She is…………..when she goes around <strong>the</strong> class and helps learners<br />

when <strong>the</strong>y are working on activities.<br />

5. She is …………….when she encourages all <strong>the</strong> learners to take part in<br />

<strong>the</strong> activities.<br />

Grouping students<br />

<br />

How do we group students?<br />

Grouping students is using different ways to organise our students when <strong>the</strong>y<br />

are working in <strong>the</strong> classroom. We usually organise <strong>the</strong>m to work in different<br />

ways during each lesson. The groupings we choose depend on <strong>the</strong> type <strong>of</strong><br />

activity, <strong>the</strong> students and <strong>the</strong> aim <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> activity.<br />

Key concepts<br />

What are <strong>the</strong> different ways we group students in <strong>the</strong> classroom?<br />

There are two different ways in which <strong>the</strong> teacher can group students in <strong>the</strong><br />

classroom. The first is when she chooses particular interaction patterns for <strong>the</strong><br />

students, i.e. ways in which students work toge<strong>the</strong>r and with <strong>the</strong> teacher in<br />

class. They include open class, group work, pairwork and individual work, and<br />

<strong>the</strong> teacher to student(s) and student(s) to teacher. In this table you can see<br />

examples <strong>of</strong> different interaction patterns.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 103


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Teaching purpose: Why? Activity: What? Interaction pattern: How?<br />

Review students' knowledge<br />

<strong>of</strong> vocabulary and/or structure<br />

and <strong>the</strong> topic or context<br />

Brainstorming<br />

1.Groups: students to students<br />

(Ss ↔Ss)<br />

2.Feedback: students to<br />

teacher (Ss-T)<br />

Check students'<br />

understanding <strong>of</strong> new<br />

vocabulary<br />

Give students practice in<br />

scanning<br />

Bingo game<br />

Reading and filling in a<br />

chart<br />

Whole class: teacher to<br />

students (T→SS)<br />

1. Individuals<br />

2.Pairwork: student to student<br />

(S ↔ S)<br />

In our lesson plans we usually use short forms for showing interaction patterns,<br />

for example T -→ Ss' ra<strong>the</strong>r than writing out 'teacher to students'. We use 'S' to<br />

mean one student, and 'Ss' to mean more than one student.<br />

The second way in which <strong>the</strong> teacher groups students is when she decides<br />

which students will work toge<strong>the</strong>r in pairs, groups or teams. The teacher<br />

considers <strong>the</strong> students' levels, <strong>learning</strong> styles, learner needs, personalities and<br />

relationships with o<strong>the</strong>rs in <strong>the</strong> class before asking students to work toge<strong>the</strong>r.<br />

She needs to think which students will work toge<strong>the</strong>r best in order to learn best.<br />

<br />

Key concepts and <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> classroom<br />

When deciding how to group students, we need to consider a number <strong>of</strong><br />

different factors:<br />

• The <strong>teaching</strong> aim. It is much easier to choose how to group students when<br />

we have decided on <strong>the</strong> aim <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson and <strong>the</strong> aim <strong>of</strong> each activity.<br />

• The <strong>learning</strong> styles <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> students. For example, some students prefer to<br />

work as individuals, o<strong>the</strong>rs in groups. Students also have different<br />

personalities and find it easier to work with some partners or groups than<br />

with o<strong>the</strong>rs.<br />

• The ability and level <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> students. Most classes are 'mixed ability'/ i-e.<br />

<strong>the</strong>y include students <strong>of</strong> different abilities. We can group students for some<br />

activities so that students <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> same ability work toge<strong>the</strong>r, and for o<strong>the</strong>r<br />

activities so that students <strong>of</strong> different abilities work toge<strong>the</strong>r.<br />

• The personalities <strong>of</strong> our students. Most <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> time students will work well<br />

toge<strong>the</strong>r, but sometimes <strong>the</strong>re are students who do not work toge<strong>the</strong>r<br />

positively, e.g. when one student is shy and ano<strong>the</strong>r is quite dominant (i.e.<br />

always talking and stopping o<strong>the</strong>rs from taking part). We need to think<br />

carefully about how to group <strong>the</strong>se students.<br />

• The class size. With a class <strong>of</strong> between 20 and 30 students, we can manage<br />

pair and group work quite easily. With classes <strong>of</strong> more than 30 students, pair<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 104


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

and group work are possible, but need more careful <strong>planning</strong>.<br />

• The previous experience <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> students. When students are not used to pair<br />

and group work we need to plan how to introduce this way <strong>of</strong> working. We<br />

can start by doing short pairwork activities and gradually introduce longer<br />

and more varied groupings.<br />

• The activities that we have chosen. For example, a discussion activity can<br />

be done in groups, a role-play can be done in pairs. But we can also<br />

choose to do <strong>the</strong>se activities differently, depending on <strong>the</strong> needs <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

group and <strong>the</strong> aims <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson. So, for example, a discussion activity can<br />

be done in pairs or as a whole class, and a role-play can be done in groups.<br />

• The balance <strong>of</strong> interaction patterns in a lesson. A lesson where learners are<br />

doing pairwork for <strong>the</strong> whole lesson will probably not be successful: learners<br />

will become bored and <strong>the</strong>re might be discipline problems. A lesson where<br />

learners are doing individual work for <strong>the</strong> whole lesson will probably not be<br />

successful ei<strong>the</strong>r: learners will lose concentration and become bored.<br />

Equally, a lesson which is wholly teacher-led is unlikely to be successful:<br />

learners need a balance <strong>of</strong> different interaction patterns within one lesson.<br />

• The group dynamics <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> class, i.e. <strong>the</strong> relationships between <strong>the</strong><br />

students and how students will behave towards each o<strong>the</strong>r.<br />

The first part <strong>of</strong> a lesson plan from a methodology book for primary learners is<br />

below. In each activity learners are grouped in different ways: <strong>the</strong>y work as a<br />

whole class, in groups and individually.<br />

Time Teacher's activity Pupils' activity<br />

5-10<br />

minutes<br />

10 minutes<br />

10 minutes<br />

1. Warmer: brief revision <strong>of</strong> colours, using a<br />

team game.<br />

2. Bring in a goldfish or a picture <strong>of</strong> a fish to<br />

introduce <strong>the</strong> topic to pupils. Discuss <strong>the</strong><br />

fish -what it looks like, its colour, its parts.<br />

Check who has a fish at home.<br />

3. Tell pupils you are going to tell <strong>the</strong>m a<br />

story. In groups pupils predict what <strong>the</strong> story<br />

will be. Get feedback from <strong>the</strong> groups.<br />

4. Explain <strong>the</strong> activity, i.e. pupils have to<br />

colour <strong>the</strong>ir fish as <strong>the</strong> story requests. Give<br />

out colours and photocopies <strong>of</strong> a fish<br />

drawing.<br />

5. Tell <strong>the</strong> first part <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> story with actions<br />

and pictures, continue <strong>the</strong> story with<br />

instructions for colouring.<br />

Pupils stand in lines behind flags<br />

.<strong>of</strong> different colours. The teacher<br />

says a colour. Pupils behind <strong>the</strong><br />

flag <strong>of</strong> that colour put up <strong>the</strong>ir<br />

hands.<br />

Pupils ga<strong>the</strong>r round <strong>the</strong> tank and<br />

say what <strong>the</strong>y know about fish.<br />

They tell each o<strong>the</strong>r something<br />

about <strong>the</strong>ir own fish. Pupils talk<br />

toge<strong>the</strong>r to try and guess what will<br />

be in <strong>the</strong> story.<br />

Group monitors give out crayons<br />

and blank sheets.<br />

Pupils colour in <strong>the</strong> fish drawings<br />

following instructions.<br />

The interaction patterns in <strong>the</strong> lesson are:<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 105


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

1 Activity 1: two large groups/teams<br />

2 Activities 2, 3 and 4: whole class and groups. In Activities 2 and 3 <strong>the</strong><br />

teacher is working with <strong>the</strong> whole class. The teacher <strong>the</strong>n divides <strong>the</strong><br />

pupils into groups for <strong>the</strong> prediction activity.<br />

3 Activity 5: individual work. In this activity <strong>the</strong> teacher is telling <strong>the</strong> story<br />

and <strong>the</strong> pupils are working on <strong>the</strong>ir own, listening and colouring.<br />

FOLLOW-UP ACTIVITIES<br />

Here is <strong>the</strong> second part <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> same lesson. For each activity, identify <strong>the</strong><br />

interaction patterns and <strong>the</strong>ir purpose for <strong>the</strong> stage <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson.<br />

Time Teacher's activity Pupils' activity<br />

5 minutes<br />

5 minutes<br />

5 minutes<br />

6. Get <strong>the</strong> pupils to compare drawings.<br />

7. Class feedback. Elicit from different learners<br />

<strong>the</strong> colours <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> little fish. Use sentence<br />

prompts, e.g. His face is...<br />

8. Ask pupils what <strong>the</strong>y thought about <strong>the</strong> story,<br />

in L1 if necessary. Ask whe<strong>the</strong>r <strong>the</strong> big fish was<br />

right not to give <strong>the</strong> little fish colour for his lips.<br />

Pupils compare drawings in<br />

pairs.<br />

Pupils talk about <strong>the</strong> colours <strong>of</strong><br />

<strong>the</strong> fish to <strong>the</strong> whole class, e.g.<br />

His face is...<br />

Pupils give <strong>the</strong>ir opinions to <strong>the</strong><br />

class.<br />

REFLECTION<br />

Which <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> following statements do you agree with and why?<br />

1. I try to have a balance <strong>of</strong> different interaction patterns in a lesson.<br />

2. It's best to separate weak/strong or shy/dominant learners into different<br />

groups or pairs.<br />

3. The age <strong>of</strong> learners that I teach makes some interaction patterns difficult.<br />

4. My learners don't like group work, so I don't do it.<br />

5. When learners work in pairs or groups, <strong>the</strong>y have more opportunities to<br />

speak than when <strong>the</strong>y work alone.<br />

PRACTICE TASK<br />

For questions 1 -6, match <strong>the</strong> different activities with <strong>the</strong> most suitable<br />

interaction patterns listed A, B or C.<br />

Interaction patterns<br />

A. pair or group work<br />

B. individual work<br />

C. whole-class work<br />

Activities<br />

6 Learners do an information-gap-activity with two sets <strong>of</strong> information.<br />

7 Learners write <strong>the</strong>ir own stories.<br />

8 Learners decide toge<strong>the</strong>r how to report <strong>the</strong>ir conclusions to <strong>the</strong> rest <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

class.<br />

9 All <strong>the</strong> learners act out a play for <strong>the</strong> parents.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 106


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

10 Learners do a written test.<br />

11 Learners take part in a choral drill.<br />

Correcting learners<br />

<br />

How do we correct learners?<br />

When we correct learners we show <strong>the</strong>m that something is wrong and that <strong>the</strong>y have<br />

made a mistake. We may also show <strong>the</strong>m how to put <strong>the</strong>ir mistake right. When learners<br />

make mistakes in speaking or writing, we correct <strong>the</strong>se mistakes in different ways. We<br />

use oral correction techniques to correct oral mistakes and written correction<br />

techniques to correct written mistakes. We also use different techniques when we<br />

correct different kinds <strong>of</strong> mistakes, i.e. errors or slips.<br />

Key concepts<br />

What ways can you think <strong>of</strong> for correcting learners' oral and written mistakes?<br />

Oral correction<br />

Here are some ways that we can correct oral mistakes:<br />

1. Drawing a time line on <strong>the</strong> board. Time lines show learners <strong>the</strong> relationship<br />

between <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> a verb tense and time. This technique is particularly useful<br />

for mistakes such as 'I have seen that film two weeks ago'. The time line to<br />

show this mistake might look like this.<br />

Past Now Future<br />

x = two weeks ago<br />

x<br />

This shows learners that, because <strong>the</strong> event is in <strong>the</strong> past and <strong>the</strong> time is<br />

specified, <strong>the</strong>y cannot use <strong>the</strong> present perfect. The correct sentence is 'I saw<br />

that film two weeks ago'.<br />

2. Finger correction. This shows learners where <strong>the</strong>y have made a mistake.<br />

We show one hand to <strong>the</strong> class and point to each finger in turn as we say<br />

each word in <strong>the</strong> sentence. One finger is usually used for each word.<br />

This technique is particularly useful when learners have left out a word or<br />

when we want <strong>the</strong>m to use a contraction, for example I'm working ra<strong>the</strong>r<br />

than I am working. We bring two fingers toge<strong>the</strong>r to show that we want<br />

<strong>the</strong>m to bring <strong>the</strong> two words toge<strong>the</strong>r.<br />

3. Gestures and/or facial expressions are useful when we do not want to<br />

interrupt learners too much, but still want to show <strong>the</strong>m that <strong>the</strong>y have<br />

made a slip. A worried look from <strong>the</strong> teacher can indicate to learners that<br />

<strong>the</strong>re is a problem. It is possible to use many different gestures qr facial<br />

expressions. The ones you use will depend on what is appropriate for<br />

your culture and your <strong>teaching</strong> situation.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 107


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

4. Phonemic symbols. Pointing to phonemic symbols is helpful when<br />

learners make pronunciation mistakes, for example using a long vowel<br />

/u:/when <strong>the</strong>y should have used a short one /u/, or when <strong>the</strong>y<br />

mispronounce a consonant. You can only use this technique with<br />

learners who are familiar with <strong>the</strong> relevant phonemic symbols.<br />

5. Echo correcting means repeating. Repeating what a learner says with<br />

rising intonation will show <strong>the</strong> learner that <strong>the</strong>re is a mistake somewhere.<br />

You will find this technique works well when learners have made small<br />

slips which you feel confident <strong>the</strong>y can correct <strong>the</strong>mselves.<br />

6. Identifying <strong>the</strong> mistake. Sometimes we need to identify <strong>the</strong> mistake by<br />

focusing learners' attention on it and telling <strong>the</strong>m that <strong>the</strong>re is a problem.<br />

This is a useful technique for correcting errors. We might say things like<br />

'You can't say it like that' or 'Are you sure?' to indicate that <strong>the</strong>y have<br />

made a mistake.<br />

7. Not correcting at <strong>the</strong> time when <strong>the</strong> mistake is made. We can use this<br />

technique to give feedback after a fluency activity, for example. It is<br />

better not to correct learners when <strong>the</strong>y are doing fluency activities, but<br />

we can make notes <strong>of</strong> serious mistakes <strong>the</strong>y make. At <strong>the</strong> end <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

activity, we can say <strong>the</strong> mistakes or write <strong>the</strong>m on <strong>the</strong> board and ask<br />

learners what <strong>the</strong> problems are.<br />

8. Peer and self-correction. Peer correction is when learners correct each<br />

o<strong>the</strong>r's mistakes. Self-correction is when learners correct <strong>the</strong>ir own<br />

mistakes. Sometimes we need to indicate that <strong>the</strong>re is a mistake for <strong>the</strong><br />

learners to correct it. Sometimes <strong>the</strong>y notice <strong>the</strong> mistake <strong>the</strong>mselves and<br />

quickly correct it. Peer and self-correction help learners to become<br />

independent <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> teacher and more aware <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir own <strong>learning</strong> needs.<br />

9. Ignoring mistakes. In fluency activities we <strong>of</strong>ten ignore all <strong>the</strong> mistakes<br />

while <strong>the</strong> activity is in progress, as <strong>the</strong> important thing is for us to be able<br />

to understand <strong>the</strong> learners' ideas and for <strong>the</strong> learners to get fluency<br />

practice. We can make a note <strong>of</strong> frequent mistakes and correct <strong>the</strong>m with<br />

<strong>the</strong> whole class after <strong>the</strong> activity. We <strong>of</strong>ten also ignore mistakes which<br />

are above <strong>the</strong> learners' current level. For example, an elementary learner<br />

telling us about what he did at <strong>the</strong> weekend might make a guess at how<br />

to talk about past time in English. We would not correct his mistakes<br />

because <strong>the</strong> past simple is a structure we have not yet taught him. We<br />

may also ignore mistakes made by a particular learner because we think<br />

this is best for that learner, e.g. a weak or shy learner. Finally, we <strong>of</strong>ten<br />

also ignore slips as learners can usually correct <strong>the</strong>se <strong>the</strong>mselves.<br />

Written correction<br />

In next unit we will see how we can use a correction code to show learners<br />

where some <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir mistakes are and what kind <strong>the</strong>y are. O<strong>the</strong>r techniques for<br />

making written corrections are:<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 108


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

1. Teacher correction. The teacher corrects <strong>the</strong> learners' mistakes by<br />

writing <strong>the</strong> correct word(s), instead <strong>of</strong> symbols from a correction code.<br />

2. Peer correction. The learners look at each o<strong>the</strong>r's work and correct it or<br />

discuss possible corrections.<br />

3. Self-correction. The learners, usually with <strong>the</strong> help <strong>of</strong> a guidance sheet,<br />

look for and correct mistakes in <strong>the</strong>ir own work.<br />

4. Ignoring <strong>the</strong> mistake. As in point 9 above, sometimes we choose to<br />

ignore mistakes that learners make.<br />

<br />

Key concepts and <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> classroom<br />

• In <strong>the</strong> classroom, we use a mix <strong>of</strong> teacher correction, peer correction and<br />

self-correction. Sometimes we need to correct learners. Sometimes we<br />

indicate to <strong>the</strong>m that <strong>the</strong>re is a mistake and <strong>the</strong>y are able to correct<br />

<strong>the</strong>mselves or o<strong>the</strong>r learners can help <strong>the</strong>m. Sometimes we ignore learners'<br />

mistakes. We choose what is appropriate for <strong>the</strong> <strong>learning</strong> purpose, <strong>the</strong><br />

learner and <strong>the</strong> situation.<br />

• The technique we use for correcting mistakes depends on <strong>the</strong> type <strong>of</strong><br />

mistake <strong>the</strong> learner has made. For example, we can use echo correction for<br />

slips, and time lines for errors.<br />

• We do not correct every mistake our learners make. We correct mistakes<br />

according to <strong>the</strong> purpose <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> activity, <strong>the</strong> stage in <strong>the</strong> lesson, <strong>the</strong><br />

seriousness <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> mistake and <strong>the</strong> learner's needs. It is inappropriate to<br />

correct all <strong>the</strong> mistakes learners make, and it can make learners lose<br />

motivation. When learners are doing a fluency activity, correction after <strong>the</strong><br />

activity would be more appropriate.<br />

• Some correction techniques are more suitable for certain types <strong>of</strong> mistake.<br />

For example, finger correction is useful for pronunciation mistakes and time<br />

lines are useful for mistakes with tenses.<br />

• Techniques such as gestures and facial expressions give opportunities for<br />

peer and self-correction. This is because we show <strong>the</strong> learners that <strong>the</strong>re is<br />

a mistake but we do not correct it.<br />

FOLLOW-UP ACTIVITIES<br />

Look at <strong>the</strong> following pairs <strong>of</strong> sentences. Learners <strong>of</strong>ten make mistakes and<br />

confuse <strong>the</strong> meaning <strong>of</strong> A and B in each pair. Draw two time lines for each pair<br />

which dearly show <strong>the</strong> differences in meaning.<br />

1 A Cinderella danced with <strong>the</strong> prince when <strong>the</strong> dock struck midnight.<br />

B Cinderella was dancing with <strong>the</strong> prince when <strong>the</strong> clock struck midnight.<br />

2 A I play tennis on Fridays.<br />

B I played tennis on Friday.<br />

REFECTION<br />

Think about <strong>the</strong>se comments from teachers. Which do you agree with and why?<br />

1 When learners make mistakes it means that <strong>the</strong>y are not <strong>learning</strong>.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 109


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

2 It is better to correct all <strong>the</strong> mistakes learners make.<br />

PRACTICE TASK<br />

For questions 1-6, match <strong>the</strong> teacher’s behaviour with <strong>the</strong> correction techniques<br />

listed A-B<br />

You need to use some options more than once.<br />

Teacher’s behariour<br />

Correction techniques<br />

A. Ignore <strong>the</strong> mistake<br />

B. Use self-correction<br />

C. Draw a time line on <strong>the</strong> board<br />

D. Use finger correction.<br />

1. You have used a correction code to show learners where <strong>the</strong>y have<br />

made mistakes in <strong>the</strong>ir writing. You now ask <strong>the</strong>m to correct <strong>the</strong>ir own<br />

mistakes. You now ask <strong>the</strong>m to correct <strong>the</strong>ir own mistakes.<br />

2. You are working with a class <strong>of</strong> elementary ten-year-olds who are doing<br />

a fluency activity. One <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> learners is talking with a class about her<br />

pet. She says: ‘My rabbit eat lettuce. ‘You let her continue talking.<br />

3. You are doing a controlled practice activity. One <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> learners says: ‘I<br />

have been working last week. ‘You show her a diagram.<br />

4. A learner is repeating <strong>the</strong> instructions for a activity and says: Then we<br />

choose/tri./(three) objects.’ You just listen.<br />

5. You are focusing on spoken <strong>language</strong> and <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> contractions. A<br />

learner says: ‘I am going swimming tomorrow, ‘You want to show her<br />

where <strong>the</strong> mistake is. You use your hand.<br />

6. An advanced learner asks you: ‘Can you borrow me a pencil, please?’<br />

You ask him to him to think about what he has said and to try again.<br />

Giving feedback<br />

<br />

How do we give feedback?<br />

Giving feedback is giving information to learners about <strong>the</strong>ir <strong>learning</strong>. Feedback<br />

can focus on learners' <strong>language</strong> or skills, <strong>the</strong> ideas in <strong>the</strong>ir work, <strong>the</strong>ir<br />

behaviour, <strong>the</strong>ir attitude to <strong>learning</strong> or <strong>the</strong>ir progress. Sometimes we give<br />

feedback to <strong>the</strong> whole class, at o<strong>the</strong>r times we give feedback to small groups or<br />

individual learners. The purposes <strong>of</strong> feedback are to motivate learners and to<br />

help <strong>the</strong>m understand what <strong>the</strong>ir problems are and how <strong>the</strong>y can improve.<br />

<br />

Key concepts<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 110


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Think <strong>of</strong> three comments you <strong>of</strong>ten give to your learners as feedback. What do<br />

<strong>the</strong>y focus on? Why do you give <strong>the</strong>m?<br />

Here are some examples <strong>of</strong> teacher feedback to learners.<br />

Example Focus Purpose<br />

Oral: 'Well done. This is much better.'<br />

Oral: 'Have ano<strong>the</strong>r look at number<br />

four. There's a problem with spelling<br />

and I think <strong>the</strong>re are more than two<br />

people.'<br />

Oral: 'Let's look at <strong>the</strong> new structure on<br />

<strong>the</strong> board again. I think some <strong>of</strong> you<br />

have misunderstood how we use it.'<br />

Written: 'What an amazing story! You've<br />

used adjectives very well this time. Your<br />

work is much better this time. You have<br />

tried very hard.'<br />

Oral: 'You've made good progress in all<br />

your work this month. Your written work<br />

is much more accurate.'<br />

Written: 'B / 70%. Have a look at<br />

grammar section 5 at <strong>the</strong> back <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

coursebook and check again <strong>the</strong><br />

difference in meaning between <strong>the</strong> past<br />

simple and <strong>the</strong> past perfect.'<br />

Oral: 'You all did <strong>the</strong> pairwork activity<br />

quite well but 1 heard too much<br />

Spanish and not enough English.'<br />

Progress,<br />

<strong>language</strong> and<br />

ideas<br />

Language and<br />

ideas<br />

Language<br />

Ideas,<br />

<strong>language</strong>,<br />

attitude and<br />

progress<br />

Language and<br />

progress<br />

Language<br />

Language,<br />

ideas and<br />

behaviour<br />

Praising <strong>the</strong> learner and telling her<br />

she is doing well; encouragement.<br />

Telling <strong>the</strong> learner <strong>the</strong>re is a<br />

problem with one <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> answers<br />

and that she needs to look at it<br />

again.<br />

Inviting learners to look again at<br />

<strong>language</strong> that <strong>the</strong>y are having<br />

problems with.<br />

Praising <strong>the</strong> learner on her good<br />

level <strong>of</strong> work, and <strong>the</strong> effort she has<br />

made and in particular on one part<br />

<strong>of</strong> her writing (adjectives).<br />

Informing <strong>the</strong> learner <strong>of</strong> her<br />

progress; encouragement.<br />

Giving a grade and informing <strong>the</strong><br />

learner <strong>of</strong> what <strong>the</strong> problem was<br />

with her work and telling her exactly<br />

what she needs to review and how.<br />

Encouraging learners but also<br />

informing <strong>the</strong>m that <strong>the</strong>y did not<br />

behave appropriately during<br />

pairwork.<br />

We can give feedback to individual learners (individual feedback) or groups <strong>of</strong><br />

learners (group feedback). When learners give feedback to one ano<strong>the</strong>r, this is<br />

called peer feedback. Feedback can be oral or written.<br />

Feedback can be linked to formal or informal assessment and can be given to<br />

learners in <strong>the</strong> classroom or during individual meetings. We can also write<br />

regular feedback in <strong>the</strong> form <strong>of</strong> comments, grades or marks on a learner's<br />

record sheet. The learner can keep this sheet in <strong>the</strong>ir portfolio or we might keep<br />

it with our records <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir overall progress and achievement. We can use this<br />

feedback when we make our end-<strong>of</strong>-course assessment.<br />

Peer feedback is useful for all learners. The learners who give <strong>the</strong> feedback<br />

reflect on <strong>the</strong> work <strong>the</strong>ir classmates have done. The learners who receive<br />

feedback are given information on how <strong>the</strong>y can improve. The learners are<br />

<strong>of</strong>ten guided by a feedback observation sheet. Young learners, though, are not<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 111


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

able to give very detailed peer feedback because <strong>the</strong>y are not yet able to think<br />

about <strong>the</strong>ir classmates' work very carefully. Peer feedback can have a positive<br />

effect on classroom dynamics and can help to train learners in skills <strong>the</strong>y need<br />

to become autonomous.<br />

Learners can also give teachers feedback about <strong>the</strong> lessons, activities and<br />

materials. They can tell us when <strong>the</strong>y like what <strong>the</strong>y are doing and when <strong>the</strong>y<br />

are not so interested in <strong>the</strong> materials or activities, or when <strong>the</strong>y are having<br />

problems with <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong>. They can also make suggestions for materials and<br />

activities to use.<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

Key concepts and <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> classroom<br />

Feedback should be positive. We should tell learners what is good, what<br />

<strong>the</strong>y are doing well, what <strong>the</strong>y need to do to improve and how. This is<br />

particularly important for weaker or less confident learners.<br />

We can give feedback in <strong>the</strong> classroom during an activity, while we are<br />

monitoring learners doing pairwork or group work or at <strong>the</strong> end <strong>of</strong> or after<br />

<strong>the</strong> lesson.<br />

During feedback we can revisit or recycle <strong>language</strong> that learners are having<br />

problems with.<br />

Learners will need training in how to give feedback to each o<strong>the</strong>r.<br />

We can organise small-group feedback sessions, where <strong>the</strong> teacher and <strong>the</strong><br />

learners can give and receive feedback on <strong>the</strong> classes and on <strong>the</strong>ir <strong>learning</strong>.<br />

Feedback which is particularly personal or sensitive should be given to<br />

learners in individual meetings and not in front <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> whole class.<br />

It is useful to give learners written or oral feedback after assessment in<br />

addition to giving <strong>the</strong>m a score - to provide encouragement and guidance for<br />

how to improve.<br />

FOLLOW-UP ACTIVITIES<br />

Here are some examples <strong>of</strong> feedback. For each one identify its focus and<br />

purpose.<br />

Feedback Focus Purpose.<br />

1. You have sat nicely for <strong>the</strong> whole lesson.<br />

Well done!<br />

2. I´m not sure that´s right. Can anyone help?<br />

3. That was very thoughtful <strong>of</strong> you to help <strong>the</strong> order<br />

group.<br />

4. This is great, but not all your work has been so<br />

good this month. Some <strong>of</strong> it was ra<strong>the</strong>r careless.<br />

REFLECTION<br />

Do you agree which <strong>the</strong>se teachers´ comments giving feedback? Why? Why<br />

not?<br />

1. My learners are only interested in <strong>the</strong> marks <strong>the</strong>y get for <strong>the</strong>ir work. They<br />

are not interested in my comments. They don´t even read <strong>the</strong>m.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 112


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

2. My group <strong>of</strong> adult learns are always asking me for feedback on <strong>the</strong>ir<br />

levels and want to know how <strong>the</strong>y doing in every lesson. I think it´s very<br />

difficult for <strong>the</strong> learners who are making slower progress. They don´t like<br />

it when I tell <strong>the</strong>m <strong>the</strong>y are doing as well as <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>rs.<br />

3. When I get my learners to give feedback to each o<strong>the</strong>r, <strong>the</strong>y just say<br />

´That´s fine’ and don´t say any more.<br />

PRACTICE TASK<br />

For questions 1-5, match <strong>the</strong> situations with <strong>the</strong> kinds <strong>of</strong> feedback listed A-C.<br />

1. The teacher notices that all <strong>the</strong> learners are having problems with <strong>the</strong><br />

new <strong>language</strong>. She notes <strong>the</strong> problem down and discusses it later with<br />

<strong>the</strong> learners.<br />

A. Peer feedback<br />

B. Teacher feedback to <strong>the</strong> class<br />

C. Teacher feedback to an individual<br />

2. A young learner has just finished talking to <strong>the</strong> class about his hobby.<br />

The teacher says: ‘Thank you very much. That was very interesting.’<br />

A. Feedback on <strong>language</strong><br />

B. Feedback on attitude<br />

C. Feedback on ideas.<br />

3. A teenage learner has written a story for homework. The teacher has<br />

written: This is so much better than last week’s homework. Well done.’<br />

A. Specific instructions on what to do<br />

B. Identifying problems<br />

C. Encouragement<br />

4. The teacher writes on <strong>the</strong> first draft <strong>of</strong> a learner’s composition: ‘Look at<br />

this website for more ideas.’<br />

A. Feedback on grammatical mistakes<br />

B. Instructions on <strong>planning</strong>.<br />

C. Help with using reference resources.<br />

5. The teacher is talking to a group <strong>of</strong> primary –school children at <strong>the</strong> end <strong>of</strong><br />

a group work activity. She says: ‘You talked a lot today and I was<br />

pleased to see everyone working so well toge<strong>the</strong>r.’<br />

A. Feedback on pronunciation<br />

B. Feedback on behavior<br />

C. Feedback on progress<br />

FLANNEL BOARD MAGNET BOARD AND ADHESIVE PLASTIC<br />

Ah three media enable pictures or texts on paper or card to be displayed to <strong>the</strong><br />

class.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 113


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Flannel board: cutout figures (pictures or words) are backed by flannel, rough<br />

sandpaper or teazlestrip (e.g. Velero) and are placed un a vertical hoard<br />

covered with flannel or blank - et - like material.<br />

Magnet board cutout figures have a small piece <strong>of</strong> strip magnet stuck on <strong>the</strong><br />

back or placed on <strong>the</strong> front. The surface <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> board is zinc nr tinplate metal<br />

sheet. The figures adhere much better than on <strong>the</strong> flannelboard. On <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r<br />

hand, <strong>the</strong> magnetboard is more inconvenient because it is much heavier and<br />

<strong>the</strong> magnets can be difficult to acquire and to keep.<br />

Adhesive plastic: a plastic is widely available which can he torn into small<br />

pieces and moulded with <strong>the</strong> fingers into small balls. It can <strong>the</strong>n be used to stick<br />

paper or card onto most smooth surfaces. In many ways this is <strong>the</strong> most useful<br />

<strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> three media if it is available to <strong>the</strong> teacher. One well - known versión is<br />

called Blu - Tack.<br />

Characteristics and techniques<br />

All three media:<br />

1. All three media are essentially for use by <strong>the</strong> teacher and material<br />

displayed should be big enough for <strong>the</strong> whole class to see.<br />

2. Sentences and scenes can 'grow' or diminish in front <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> class as words<br />

or pictures are added, moved or taken away.<br />

3. The words and pictures can be handled by <strong>the</strong> teacher or students before<br />

being placed on <strong>the</strong> board or surface.<br />

4. On <strong>the</strong> magnatboard, background settings (for example, a street) can he<br />

drawn on large pieces <strong>of</strong> paper and placed on <strong>the</strong> board. Pictures can be<br />

placed on top <strong>of</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r pictures.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 114


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

5. With adhesive plastic no preparation is required and any piece <strong>of</strong> paper or<br />

card can be stuck or moved from one position to ano<strong>the</strong>r. Pictures can be<br />

placed on top <strong>of</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r pictures including large pieces <strong>of</strong> paper<br />

representing settings.<br />

6. Essentially all three media allow <strong>the</strong> teacher and .students to simulate in a<br />

very simple form and with great flexibility, scenes, situations and stores as<br />

well as diagrams and short texts. Thus a great variety <strong>of</strong> <strong>language</strong> can he<br />

contextualized through <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>se media.<br />

7. Teachers nervous <strong>of</strong> drawing on <strong>the</strong> chalkboard can prepare visuals in<br />

advance with <strong>the</strong>se three media.<br />

Presentation and controlled practice<br />

Characteristics and techniques: showing one or more pictures illustrating objects or<br />

actions.<br />

At <strong>the</strong> most basic level, pictures can he used to introduce <strong>the</strong> meaning <strong>of</strong> <strong>language</strong><br />

new to <strong>the</strong> students or to cue answers to questions or substitutions within sentences.<br />

Presenting vocabulary<br />

TEACHER: This is a cat. It's on <strong>the</strong> table!. Now it's under <strong>the</strong> table!, etc.<br />

Vocabulary practice<br />

The teacher puts a large piece <strong>of</strong> paper on <strong>the</strong> hoard (magnet board only) with <strong>the</strong><br />

outline <strong>of</strong> an elephant drawn on it. He or she <strong>the</strong>n places food inside <strong>the</strong> elephant.<br />

Students take it in turns to name <strong>the</strong> food and <strong>the</strong>n lo list ah <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r food <strong>the</strong> elephant<br />

has eaten.<br />

TEACHER:<br />

STUDENT:<br />

TEACHER:<br />

STUDENT:<br />

What's this?<br />

It's an apple.<br />

So, what has <strong>the</strong> elephant eaten?<br />

The elephant has eaten a piece <strong>of</strong> cake, a cabbage, some sugar and an<br />

apple. etc.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 115


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Open communicative practice<br />

Characteristics and techniques: <strong>the</strong> flexibility <strong>of</strong> being to give students pictures to hold<br />

which <strong>the</strong>y can <strong>the</strong>n come to <strong>the</strong> front <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> class and stick on <strong>the</strong> board.<br />

The students can be divided into pairs or groups. Each student can be given one<br />

picture and/or word and students take it in turns to place <strong>the</strong>ir pictures on <strong>the</strong> board.<br />

They must he able to say what connection (heir picture has with <strong>the</strong> last picture or word<br />

placed <strong>the</strong>re. If <strong>the</strong> class like (he idea, <strong>the</strong> picture can be left on <strong>the</strong> hoard.<br />

The activity can be done by having only two pictures which have to be related or by<br />

telling a story with each successive picture illustrating <strong>the</strong> next part <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> story.<br />

In this example, <strong>the</strong> two pictures have been related:<br />

STUDENT: The ghost has lived in this house for three hundred years.<br />

Listening comprehension and oral retelling<br />

Characteristics and techniques: building up a situation, moving pictures to illustrate a<br />

story.<br />

These three media lend <strong>the</strong>mselves to <strong>the</strong> established audio visual approach <strong>of</strong> using<br />

pictures Lo illustrate a story or a dialogue. The understanding <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> story helps <strong>the</strong><br />

student to understand <strong>the</strong> meaning <strong>of</strong> <strong>language</strong> new to <strong>the</strong>m. The students having<br />

heard and understood <strong>the</strong> story <strong>the</strong>n retell it, act out <strong>the</strong> dialogue and change <strong>the</strong><br />

[Escribir texto] Página 116


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

pictures as required.<br />

Owing to shortage <strong>of</strong> space in this book, only three .scenes <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> story are illustrate<br />

below. However, in <strong>the</strong> classroom <strong>the</strong> number <strong>of</strong> intermediary stages is limited only by<br />

<strong>the</strong> number <strong>of</strong> pictures <strong>the</strong> teacher can get hold <strong>of</strong>.<br />

When Ron was a twenty he used to be so nice and so happy. He used to play with his<br />

teddy bear. And everybody used lo like him.........<br />

etc.<br />

When Ron was twenty he was a student. He was poor but he was happy. He used to<br />

live in a little room and in he winter he used to wear his coat in his room because he<br />

hadn't got enough money for a heater. He didn't play with his teddy hear anymore but<br />

he used to keep it with him for luck! etc.<br />

(Note: <strong>the</strong> picture <strong>of</strong> Ron al, twenty can be stuck on top <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> picture <strong>of</strong> Ron as a<br />

baby.)<br />

Now he is fifty. He has a car and a big house but he is a miserable man. He is always<br />

complaining. No one likes him.<br />

The first few developments in a story are illustrated here. The picture grows and<br />

changes according to <strong>the</strong> stage in <strong>the</strong> story.<br />

Technical tips<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 117


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Magnetboard<br />

1. Magnetboards can be made easily and cheaply. Hardware shops sell <strong>the</strong> metal<br />

plate. Check that magnets stick to it. The metal should be about 1 m by 1.5 m<br />

depending on how you can cope with <strong>the</strong> weight. The metal should be<br />

mounted on a wooden frame or against wooden board. The alternative is to<br />

use a metal cupboard if <strong>the</strong>re is one convenient. (As mentioned before, some<br />

whiteboards are already magnetised.)<br />

2. Magnetic strip can be obtained from refrigerator repairers; it is used as <strong>the</strong> seal<br />

on refrigerator doors. Hardware shops or stationers sometimes sell magnetic<br />

strips or small, flat magnets.<br />

Flannelboard<br />

1. Flannel or blanket-like material should be stretched no a board. Because <strong>the</strong><br />

figures do not adhere as well as on a magnetboard it is an advantage lo<br />

position <strong>the</strong> board so that it is leaning ra<strong>the</strong>r than vertical.<br />

2. The figures must have a rough surface on <strong>the</strong> back which adheres to <strong>the</strong> board.<br />

Sandpaper or flannel itself will work reasonably well. However, a commercial<br />

product like flock paper or teazel or Velcro is better.<br />

Adhesive plastic<br />

The surface should be free from dust. The chalkboard ought to be sponged clean and<br />

must be allowed to dry before <strong>the</strong> adhesive will stick. An alternative a rubber glue<br />

which peels <strong>of</strong>f when dry and does riot damage 11w surface or <strong>the</strong> picture.<br />

Notes for all three media<br />

1. Pictures can be cut from magazines. Very <strong>of</strong> ten it is more satisfactory to draw<br />

<strong>the</strong>m and to colour <strong>the</strong>m with fell tip pens.<br />

2. Some teachers do not attempt to have individual pictures for alt objects. They<br />

have a number <strong>of</strong> symmetrical shapes which <strong>the</strong>y introduce at <strong>the</strong> beginning <strong>of</strong><br />

each activity as symbols <strong>of</strong> particular objects. Here are examples <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> sort <strong>of</strong><br />

basic shapes which can he used to symbolize different things:<br />

The advantage <strong>of</strong> this approach is not only that it is time saving but that some students<br />

like <strong>the</strong> challenge to <strong>the</strong>ir imagination.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 118


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

3. In all cases it is it is advisable to mount <strong>the</strong> pictures on thin card and to cover<br />

<strong>the</strong>m with a clear; self adhesive plastic so that <strong>the</strong>y can be used many times.<br />

WALLPICTURES AND WALLPOSTERS<br />

Wallpictures and wallposters illustrate screen people or objects and are large enough<br />

to be seen by all <strong>the</strong>y students.<br />

1. Produced commercially for <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> purposes (see Byrne, Dand, Hall,<br />

D, 1976 Wall pictures for <strong>language</strong> practice Longman.)<br />

2. Produced for o<strong>the</strong>r educational purposes, for example, a mad safety poster, or<br />

for commercial purpose unconnected with education, for example, a publicity<br />

poster.<br />

3. Produced for <strong>the</strong> teacher and or student, ei<strong>the</strong>r drawn or made by collage (see<br />

page 116).<br />

Characteristics and Techniques<br />

1. Wallpictures <strong>of</strong>ten show a complicated scene and contain many details. If <strong>the</strong><br />

students cannot see ant <strong>the</strong> necessary detail or if <strong>the</strong>y are distracted by <strong>the</strong><br />

rest <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> pictures <strong>the</strong>n that is clearly a disadvantage. On <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r hand, it is<br />

<strong>the</strong> very complexity <strong>of</strong> most wallpictures which make some activities so useful.<br />

2. The whole class can see <strong>the</strong> picture.<br />

3. It is ready to use and can be use more than once.<br />

4. It can be left on display or taken down.<br />

Presentation and guided practice<br />

Characteristics and techniques: a wallpictures like <strong>the</strong> one illustrated above provides a<br />

context for <strong>language</strong> use and a variety <strong>of</strong> reference for controller! practice in both<br />

speaking and writing.<br />

Wallpictures have a traditional role in <strong>the</strong> presenting <strong>of</strong> new <strong>language</strong>, both vocabulary<br />

and structures, to <strong>the</strong> students. In <strong>the</strong> hand draw pictures illustrate above, <strong>the</strong> teacher<br />

can introduce many words for people and objects seen in a Street. The scene as a<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 119


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

whole gives a contexts for this new <strong>language</strong> and an opportunity to move into<br />

controlled practice by <strong>the</strong> student.<br />

The present perfect tense<br />

Traditionally, <strong>the</strong> wallpictures is associated with <strong>the</strong> present continuous tense.<br />

However, o<strong>the</strong>r tense forms can be introduced and practiced, for example, <strong>the</strong> present<br />

perfect.<br />

TEACHER: (pointing at <strong>the</strong> man coming out <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> shop) This man is coming out <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

shop. He is got a bag. He's bought something. What has be bought, do you think?.<br />

And this woman, she's dropped something on <strong>the</strong> pavement. What has she dropped?<br />

Having introduced <strong>the</strong> present perfect, <strong>the</strong> teacher night write a sentence pattern table<br />

on <strong>the</strong> board and ask <strong>the</strong> students to <strong>of</strong>fer more example based on <strong>the</strong> picture. For<br />

example.<br />

STUDENT A: The cat has climbed <strong>the</strong> tree.<br />

STUDENT B: The plane has left <strong>the</strong> airport<br />

STUDENT C: <strong>the</strong> woman has crossed <strong>the</strong> road<br />

Might<br />

Scenes always imply that something has happened before <strong>the</strong> time and <strong>the</strong> pictures<br />

and that something id going to happen afterwards. The teacher can exploit this<br />

example.<br />

TEACHER: What night <strong>the</strong> women have done before her bag broker<br />

STUDENT: she might have put too many heavy things in it<br />

TEACHER: What might she do next?<br />

STUDENT: She might wrap <strong>the</strong> shopping in her scarf.<br />

True/False game<br />

Controlled practice does not always need to be an occasion when <strong>the</strong> students merely<br />

articulate <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong>. Activities can be introduced which make <strong>the</strong> student thing<br />

about meaning and want to communicate it. For example <strong>the</strong> well - known true/false<br />

game can be used. The teacher (or a student) makes a number <strong>of</strong> statements some <strong>of</strong><br />

which are true and some <strong>of</strong> which are false. If this is dome orally <strong>the</strong>n <strong>the</strong> students can<br />

correct <strong>the</strong> teacher when he or she makes a false statement. For example.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 120


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

TEACHER: The can is being chased by <strong>the</strong> dog<br />

STUDENTS: No! The dog is being chased by <strong>the</strong> cat.<br />

(In <strong>the</strong> pictures, <strong>the</strong> dog really is being chased by <strong>the</strong> cat!)<br />

If <strong>the</strong> true/false games is done in writing, <strong>the</strong>n <strong>the</strong> teacher might write a number <strong>of</strong><br />

sentences on <strong>the</strong> board and ask <strong>the</strong> student to copy <strong>the</strong> correct ones and to correct<br />

and <strong>the</strong>n copy <strong>the</strong> incorrect ones.<br />

Once this version <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> activity has been done, each student can write a number <strong>of</strong><br />

sentences making some true and some false. The student <strong>the</strong>n read out each o<strong>the</strong>rs<br />

sentences if <strong>the</strong>y are true.<br />

Memory game<br />

Ano<strong>the</strong>r well established game which can transform a mechanical exercise into real<br />

communication is <strong>the</strong> memory game. The teacher stands with his or her back to <strong>the</strong><br />

picture and tries to describe every think in it. The students correct <strong>the</strong> teacher<br />

whenever he or she makes a mistake, a source <strong>of</strong> great satisfaction to <strong>the</strong> students.<br />

Once <strong>the</strong> students have understood <strong>the</strong> games <strong>the</strong>y can try it out in pairs or groups for<br />

<strong>the</strong>mselves with one <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>n (or possibly two) trying to describe <strong>the</strong> picture from<br />

memory.<br />

Hide and seek<br />

Prepositions can be practiced with <strong>the</strong> game <strong>of</strong> hide and seek. One student imagines<br />

that he or she is a mouse and is hiding somewhere in <strong>the</strong> picture. The o<strong>the</strong>r students<br />

try to find out where <strong>the</strong> mouse is hiding.<br />

STUDENT A: Are your in <strong>the</strong> old man's pocket<br />

STUDENT MOUSE:: No.<br />

STUDENT B: Are you behind <strong>the</strong> tree in <strong>the</strong> park<br />

STUDENT MOUSE: No.<br />

Etc,<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 121


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Older students might prefer to imagine that <strong>the</strong>y have hidden something in <strong>the</strong> picture.<br />

Guided Writing<br />

You can give students a text with some words or sentences missing. The students<br />

complete <strong>the</strong> text by referring to <strong>the</strong> picture.<br />

Dialogues<br />

Characteristics and <strong>the</strong> techniques; <strong>the</strong> quality and variety <strong>of</strong> Information related to a<br />

<strong>the</strong>me in both wallpictures on page 44 provides a, context for dialogue and role play.<br />

The dialogues can be controlled as in <strong>the</strong> fist example below or open as in second<br />

example.<br />

Controlled Dialogue<br />

Write a model dialogue on <strong>the</strong> board which one or two pairs <strong>of</strong> students act out in front<br />

<strong>of</strong> class. When you feel that all <strong>the</strong> students understand <strong>the</strong> dialogue, ask <strong>the</strong>m to work<br />

with a neighbor and to device a new dialogue substituting o<strong>the</strong>r words for those which<br />

are underlined, based on <strong>the</strong> picture. Your dialogue might be like this,<br />

SMALL BOY: Where are we going now, Mummy?<br />

MOTHER: We are going to <strong>the</strong> baker's.<br />

Students might change <strong>the</strong> dialogue to: *<br />

CAT: Where are we going now, Fred?<br />

DOG: We are going to <strong>the</strong> park,<br />

Open Dialogue<br />

In this example, students have studied <strong>the</strong> wallpicture <strong>of</strong> animals on page 44 an have<br />

invented and written a dialogue which <strong>the</strong>y can <strong>the</strong>n act out for <strong>the</strong> class or direct<br />

ano<strong>the</strong>r pair to act for <strong>the</strong>m. The students have used <strong>the</strong> pictures <strong>of</strong> animals on <strong>the</strong><br />

poster as a reference ra<strong>the</strong>r than as a setting for <strong>the</strong>ir dialogue.<br />

ANIMAL RIGHTS WOMAN::<br />

HUNTER:<br />

ANIMAL RIGHTS WOMAN::<br />

HUNTER:<br />

ANIMAL RIGHTS WOMAN::<br />

You shouldn't kill birds<br />

Why not?<br />

Because it is wrong<br />

But <strong>the</strong> birds eat <strong>the</strong> corn<br />

These birds don't eat corn, <strong>the</strong>y<br />

eat insect.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 122


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Vocabulary<br />

Characteristics and Techniques: The pictures can be displayed quickly and is<br />

complexity can provide a rich source <strong>of</strong> vocabulary practice.<br />

The students call out in, say, five minutes ail <strong>the</strong> words <strong>the</strong>y remember which can be<br />

related to <strong>the</strong> pictures. More advanced students can be restricted to certain kinds <strong>of</strong>,<br />

words, for example adjectives. One our two students "secretaries" write down all <strong>the</strong><br />

words given by <strong>the</strong> class on <strong>the</strong> board.<br />

As <strong>the</strong> students call out <strong>the</strong> words you should make a rapid note <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>n. (Alternatively<br />

be ready to cover <strong>the</strong> board with paper or a cloth).<br />

When all <strong>the</strong> words have been written down, give <strong>the</strong> students a moment to look at<br />

<strong>the</strong>m and <strong>the</strong>n erase <strong>the</strong>m. Each student <strong>the</strong>n tries to remember all <strong>the</strong> words and to<br />

write <strong>the</strong>m down. After five minutes ask <strong>the</strong> students to work with <strong>the</strong>ir neighbor and to<br />

compile a joint list. After ano<strong>the</strong>r five minutes ask pairs <strong>of</strong> students to work toge<strong>the</strong>r in<br />

groups <strong>of</strong> four to compile <strong>the</strong>ir final composite list. Tell <strong>the</strong> students to put <strong>the</strong>ir words<br />

into alphabetical order. See which group remembers <strong>the</strong> most words.<br />

Listening comprehension<br />

Characteristics and techniques: <strong>the</strong> variety and complexity <strong>of</strong> information in <strong>the</strong> wall<br />

picture mean that students must listen or read very carefully in order to identify what is<br />

being referred to.<br />

The teacher describes: 1 a person's appearance in <strong>the</strong> picture 2 a person's thoughts 3<br />

an object 4 what <strong>the</strong> teacher thinks about anything in <strong>the</strong> picture. The students try to<br />

say who or what is being described. The description can be easy both conceptually and<br />

linguistically or be very demanding in both senses. Here is a description intended for<br />

beginners:<br />

TEACHER: He is thinking. I must go slowly. It's dangerous/<br />

STUDENT A: The man on <strong>the</strong> motorbike.<br />

TEACHER: Yes.<br />

A more demanding example:<br />

TEACHER: What a wonderful quiet place to retreat to in <strong>the</strong> lunch break.<br />

STUDENT B: The Park.<br />

TEACHER: Yes.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 123


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Free communicative practice<br />

Characteristics and techniques: <strong>the</strong> variety and complexity <strong>of</strong> information <strong>of</strong>fers<br />

considerable choice <strong>of</strong> what to talk about.<br />

Speculation<br />

With <strong>the</strong> wallpicture made <strong>of</strong> magazine pictures-<strong>of</strong> animals (page 44), <strong>the</strong> students<br />

could be asked to identify <strong>the</strong> animals, to say where <strong>the</strong>y live and lo talk about <strong>the</strong>ir<br />

characteristics. The students can <strong>the</strong>n he asked to discuss broader issues such as, '<strong>the</strong><br />

relationship between <strong>the</strong>se animals and people', 'animal rights', animals' in history', and<br />

<strong>the</strong>ir own personal associations with <strong>the</strong>se animals.<br />

Story - telling<br />

In <strong>the</strong> picture <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> street scene (page 44) <strong>the</strong>re is a great variety <strong>of</strong> information which<br />

could provide a basis for story-telling. Students rnight be asked to imagine what one <strong>of</strong><br />

<strong>the</strong> people is thinking or feeling and to write a short story about him nr her. The story<br />

could include reference to several places or o<strong>the</strong>r people in <strong>the</strong> picture.<br />

Technical tips<br />

1. The students al <strong>the</strong> back <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> class must be able to see and recognize <strong>the</strong> details<br />

that you want <strong>the</strong>m to see. The only way to ensure this happens is to test it. As a<br />

general rule details must be about 2 cm in height to be seen <strong>the</strong> length <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

classroom. Never<strong>the</strong>less, testing is <strong>the</strong> only way <strong>of</strong> being sure.<br />

2. Teachers and students can make wallpictures by drawing <strong>the</strong>m and/or by sticking<br />

pictures from magazines, etc. on to <strong>the</strong> paper. Although <strong>the</strong> result is, by definition,<br />

amateurish <strong>the</strong> students are very likely to appreciate it as much or more than a<br />

commercially produced picture.<br />

3. The drawing style used must be almost diagrammatic with clear, simple outlines and<br />

simple colour - filled shapes ra<strong>the</strong>r than a sketchy, impressionistic style which is difficult<br />

to read.<br />

4. The easiest way to store wallpictures is o fold <strong>the</strong>m neatly, unless you have access<br />

to a map rack or shell.<br />

5. For more suggestions for drawing, mounting and displaying wallpictures<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 124


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Picture flash cards<br />

Picture flash cards are pictures mounted or drawn on cards approximately 15 cm by 20<br />

cm. They are normally used by <strong>the</strong> teacher in oral work for cueing responses to<br />

questions or in more open communicative work for stimulating conversation, storytelling,<br />

etc. The normal picture card has a picture on one side only. However, both<br />

sides can be used and <strong>the</strong> card can be folded or cut to various ways with particular<br />

<strong>teaching</strong> purposes in mind.<br />

Characteristics and techniques<br />

1. Picture cards are easy and inexpensive for <strong>the</strong> teacher lo prepare which means<br />

that sets <strong>of</strong> cards related to <strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> points nr lo subject matter can<br />

be built up over a period <strong>of</strong> time.<br />

2. The cards are easy to store and to carry to <strong>the</strong> classroom so <strong>the</strong>y <strong>of</strong>fer<br />

considerable flexibility to <strong>the</strong> teacher in <strong>the</strong> conduct <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson.<br />

3. The cards can be shown to <strong>the</strong> whole class nr (o a single student which allows<br />

<strong>the</strong> teacher to control who receives <strong>the</strong> information on <strong>the</strong>m.<br />

4. Because <strong>the</strong>y hey are held and can be presented at speed or in a leisurely<br />

manner, <strong>the</strong> teacher can control <strong>the</strong> pace, variety and interest <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> lesson.<br />

5. The teacher can show one or two cards al any one lime by hand. However, <strong>the</strong><br />

cards can also be propped on a shelf, for example, at, <strong>the</strong> bottom <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

chalkboard. The cards can also be pinned on a board, or stuck to a<br />

magnetboard or to any smooth surface with adhesive plastic. The student can<br />

be asked to stand at <strong>the</strong> front <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> class and to hold cards. In this way a great<br />

number <strong>of</strong> cards can be displayed.<br />

6. The cards are used in group work by <strong>the</strong> students.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 125


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Presentation<br />

Characteristic and techniques; <strong>the</strong>re is great flexibility in being able to show one or<br />

several picture cards at key moments.<br />

Teaching meaning with one picture<br />

Sometimes it is possible to show a single picture illustrating a new word and expect it<br />

to be understood. For example, a bicycle:<br />

Teaching meaning using several pictures<br />

Usually it is advisable to show several pictures to be sure that <strong>the</strong> students know what<br />

you are referring to. For example, in <strong>teaching</strong> <strong>the</strong> present perfect continuous: He has<br />

been swimming. She's been climbing. They’ve been eating. These cards can be shown<br />

to <strong>the</strong> class and <strong>the</strong>n propped on a shelf, each reinforcing <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>rs.<br />

Contrasting meanings<br />

Sometimes it is helpful to introduce contrasting <strong>language</strong> items at <strong>the</strong> same time. The<br />

two pictures can be placed on ei<strong>the</strong>r side <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> card. In <strong>the</strong> act <strong>of</strong> turning <strong>the</strong> card over<br />

<strong>the</strong> contrast is demonstrated. The examples given below are: can/can’t likes/doesn't.<br />

like, too big/too small:<br />

Comparing meanings<br />

Card can also be folded. In <strong>the</strong> example below, <strong>the</strong> difference between *hill' and<br />

'mountain' is demonstrated. Each one may be seen by itself or in comparison with <strong>the</strong><br />

o<strong>the</strong>r.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 126


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Presenting meanings <strong>of</strong> new words in a story<br />

Sometimes it is essential to introduce <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong> within a longer text, perhaps a<br />

story. The <strong>language</strong> which is already known to <strong>the</strong> student leads to an understanding <strong>of</strong><br />

<strong>the</strong> story and Ibis understanding <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> story indicates <strong>the</strong> meaning <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> new<br />

<strong>language</strong>. Picture cards can be used to illustrate <strong>the</strong> story and by making <strong>the</strong> story<br />

more readily understood, <strong>the</strong> new <strong>language</strong>, in turn, might be understood by <strong>the</strong><br />

student. It is important to say 'might he' because it is <strong>of</strong>ten difficult to ascertain just how<br />

people have responded to and interpreted <strong>the</strong> information <strong>the</strong>y have received.<br />

Folding card story<br />

A miniature story is created simply by folding <strong>the</strong> paper. By folding <strong>the</strong> paper into three<br />

panels, three stages in <strong>the</strong> story can be illustrated and this, in turn, illustrates three<br />

tense forms.<br />

He's going to sit on <strong>the</strong> cat. He's sitting on <strong>the</strong> cat. He has sat on <strong>the</strong> cat.<br />

Note: If you show one exam pie <strong>of</strong> this three fold story, you could ask <strong>the</strong> students to<br />

produce one <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>ir own for homework. Although it would only involve <strong>the</strong>m in dealing<br />

with one example <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>se three tense forms, it would never<strong>the</strong>less he very intensive<br />

and memorable. They would also be able to show <strong>the</strong>ir work to <strong>the</strong>ir fellow students<br />

and more practice would occur.<br />

Practice<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 127


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Characteristics and techniques: a great variety <strong>of</strong> pictures can be shown at a moment’s<br />

notice to <strong>the</strong> student’s one after <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r nr <strong>the</strong> cards can be placed un a shelf. The<br />

pictures can provide reference for <strong>the</strong> students as <strong>the</strong>y answer nr ask questions, make<br />

substitutions or complete sentences.<br />

TEACHER; (holding op a picture <strong>of</strong> some apples) I’ve been to <strong>the</strong> shops. What did I<br />

buy?<br />

STUDENT: You bought some apples.<br />

Alternatively, don't show <strong>the</strong> picture to <strong>the</strong> students, so that <strong>the</strong>y must guess what you<br />

have bought. The <strong>language</strong> practice <strong>the</strong> same but <strong>the</strong> interest is greater and <strong>language</strong><br />

is used more meaningfully.<br />

Pictures and sentence patterns<br />

The teacher might wish lo write a sentence model table on <strong>the</strong> board to guide <strong>the</strong><br />

students and <strong>the</strong>n use picture flash cards to cue variations. Usually this kind <strong>of</strong> work<br />

requires <strong>the</strong> student to think very little about <strong>the</strong> meaning <strong>of</strong> what he or she is saying. It<br />

is possible, however, Lo plan <strong>the</strong> activity so that <strong>the</strong> student must give more thought lo<br />

meaning before speaking. In <strong>the</strong> example below, <strong>the</strong> student has a choice <strong>of</strong> what to<br />

say based on his or her general knowledge. The teacher writes <strong>the</strong> model on <strong>the</strong><br />

board.<br />

TEACHER: (showing a picture <strong>of</strong> a horse and pointing a student) what about horses,<br />

Edwina? - -<br />

STUDENT: Horses can jump but <strong>the</strong>y can’t fly.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 128


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Expressing personal preferences<br />

The examples above provide a certain amount <strong>of</strong> practice in <strong>the</strong> manipulation <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

<strong>language</strong> and <strong>the</strong>y do demand some attention to <strong>the</strong> meaning. However, such practice<br />

is, by its nature, remote from <strong>the</strong> way <strong>language</strong> is used for real purposes. After ah <strong>the</strong><br />

teacher knows very well that horses can jump but not fly! So why should <strong>the</strong> student<br />

say this? Simple practice <strong>of</strong> <strong>language</strong> points can <strong>of</strong>ten be achieved with a closer<br />

approximation to <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> <strong>language</strong> in order to communicate an idea. In <strong>the</strong> example<br />

below, <strong>the</strong> student is practicing <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong> 'would' but, at <strong>the</strong> same time, expressing his<br />

or her own preferences which <strong>the</strong> teacher could not have predicted. In this sense <strong>the</strong><br />

student is telling <strong>the</strong> teacher something he or she did not know. A simple practice<br />

exercise is thus being used for real communicative purposes.<br />

Two basic sentence should be written on <strong>the</strong> board I would prefer <strong>the</strong> orange.<br />

I don't like ei<strong>the</strong>r <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>m<br />

TEACHER: (showing two pictures <strong>of</strong> fruit) which would you prefer, or perhaps you don't<br />

like ei<strong>the</strong>r <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong>m?<br />

STUDENT: I would prefer <strong>the</strong> people<br />

TEACHER: Fine<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 129


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Note: Because <strong>the</strong> student is being asked to give genuine response, it is only natural<br />

that you should respond to what he or she says in some way, even it is only to smile<br />

and to say, 'fine', “good”, “right', etc.<br />

Mini role plays cued by pictures<br />

In <strong>the</strong> above example <strong>the</strong> students are being asked to express <strong>the</strong>ir preferences.<br />

Pictures provide one way <strong>of</strong> stimulating and giving reference to such "mini' but real<br />

conversations. An alternative ¡s to have mini role plays in which <strong>the</strong> students pretend to<br />

be a character. What <strong>the</strong> students say is cued by <strong>the</strong> picture and might be in response<br />

to what is said to <strong>the</strong>m. The teacher or ano<strong>the</strong>r student might provide The o<strong>the</strong>r role.<br />

TEACHER: What are you doing this evening, Roger? (asking <strong>the</strong> question and <strong>the</strong>n<br />

showing a picture <strong>of</strong> a basketball match)<br />

STUDENT: I'm going to a basketball match.<br />

TEACHER: That's great! /how interesting/Ra<strong>the</strong>r you than me!<br />

The slow picture reveal<br />

The card can be put in an envelope and <strong>the</strong>n withdraw a centimeter at a time. As <strong>the</strong><br />

students see more <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> picture ask <strong>the</strong>m lo try lo identify what <strong>the</strong>y can see and to<br />

predict what might appear next in <strong>the</strong> picture. This gives guided practice in <strong>the</strong> use <strong>of</strong><br />

descriptive <strong>language</strong>.<br />

Open communicative practice<br />

Characteristics and techniques: <strong>the</strong> cards can be juxtaposed rapidly.<br />

Imagining connections<br />

Show <strong>the</strong> students any two picture cards toge<strong>the</strong>r and ask <strong>the</strong>m to imagine a<br />

connection between <strong>the</strong>m.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 130


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

STUDENT: This man is driving home very quickly because he is hungry and wants his<br />

dinner.<br />

Story connections<br />

The example above can be extended into a story with each part <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> story cued by<br />

<strong>the</strong> next picture (chosen at random). The picture can be propped up on a shelf.<br />

Alternatively, <strong>the</strong>y can be kept in <strong>the</strong> teacher's hand, in order. Each student who adds a<br />

sentence to <strong>the</strong> story must retell <strong>the</strong> story so far, cued by <strong>the</strong> pictures. Here is a<br />

example.<br />

The man was driving home very quickly because he was hungry and wanted his<br />

dinner. He thought about his difficult job and he wished he could live on a desert island.<br />

He remembered his old friend Bill <strong>the</strong> Knife. He remembered that Bill loved ice cream.<br />

Suddenly he saw a dog in <strong>the</strong> road.<br />

An alternative to <strong>the</strong> above example is to show <strong>the</strong> pictures Lo <strong>the</strong> students and to ask<br />

<strong>the</strong>m to write for fur minutes about each one. Insist that <strong>the</strong> writing links toge<strong>the</strong>r as<br />

one story. At <strong>the</strong> end <strong>of</strong> time four minutes <strong>the</strong> students should take it in turns to read<br />

out <strong>the</strong>ir story Lo <strong>the</strong>ir neighbors. Ask one or two students to read out <strong>the</strong>ir story to <strong>the</strong><br />

class as a whole.<br />

Flashing a picture<br />

Flash a picture card at <strong>the</strong> class at great speed and ask <strong>the</strong> students what <strong>the</strong>y saw.<br />

Some will say <strong>the</strong>y saw nothing, o<strong>the</strong>rs will, amazingly, have seen something.<br />

Encourage differences <strong>of</strong> opinion and do not confirm or deny any ideas. Flash <strong>the</strong><br />

picture again and ask <strong>the</strong> students to tell each o<strong>the</strong>r what <strong>the</strong>y think <strong>the</strong>y saw. Continue<br />

flashing, encouraging differences and debate. Finally show time picture.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 131


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Technical tips<br />

1. The pictures must be clear enough to be seen <strong>the</strong> length <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> classroom and at<br />

some speed. Magazine photographs may sometimes be too complicated and full <strong>of</strong><br />

irrelevant detail. One way <strong>of</strong> reducing <strong>the</strong> distracting detail is to cut away <strong>the</strong><br />

background leaving <strong>the</strong> main shape.<br />

2. Line drawings should be simple and not sketchy. The lines should he quite thick, <strong>the</strong><br />

shape should be as suggestive <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> object as possible.<br />

3. Colour should be used to make <strong>the</strong> shape stand out clearly and to contribute to<br />

recognition; for example, orange for an orange, yellow for a lemon. Sometimes colour<br />

can be used to draw attention to a small shape in <strong>the</strong> picture, for example, a small<br />

present; <strong>the</strong> rest <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> picture can be drawn with black lines and <strong>the</strong> present can be<br />

brightly colored. Just using colors for decorative purposes is probably a mistake in<br />

<strong>language</strong> <strong>teaching</strong>.<br />

4. Card is expensive. Sometimes cheap ‘cuts' can be obtained free from a local printer.<br />

O<strong>the</strong>rwise use food packets or cut up cardboard boxes.<br />

Word flash cards<br />

Word flash cards are usually about 8 cm in height and are as long as is necessary for<br />

<strong>the</strong> text. They are principality, though not exclusively, used in <strong>the</strong> <strong>teaching</strong> <strong>of</strong> reading<br />

and writings.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 132


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Characteristics and techniques<br />

1. Word flash cards are easy and inexpensive for <strong>the</strong> teacher to prepare<br />

2. The cards are easy lo store and to carry to <strong>the</strong> classroom.<br />

3. They are easy for <strong>the</strong> teacher and <strong>the</strong> student's to handle and to use at <strong>the</strong><br />

appropriate moment They can be head, propped, or stuck to <strong>the</strong> board A<br />

number <strong>of</strong> cards can be displayed al <strong>the</strong> same time: by asking several students<br />

to hold <strong>the</strong>m, by stitching <strong>the</strong>m to <strong>the</strong> board, by clipping <strong>the</strong>m to a wire (see<br />

technical tips page 118), by propping <strong>the</strong>m on a shelf, by using a sentence<br />

maker. (See technical tips page 64.)<br />

Presentation<br />

Characteristic and techniques <strong>the</strong> cards can be prepared by <strong>the</strong> teacher and or<br />

students and may be handled and <strong>the</strong> stuck on different surfaces with adhesive plastic,<br />

sticky tape, pins, etc.<br />

Labelling classroom objects<br />

A well-established way <strong>of</strong> using word cards is for <strong>the</strong> teacher to stick <strong>the</strong>m on objects in<br />

<strong>the</strong> classroom: <strong>the</strong> door, <strong>the</strong> cupboard, a window, a desk, etc. The intention is to<br />

familiarize <strong>the</strong> student with <strong>the</strong> written form <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> word.<br />

At <strong>the</strong> reading practice stage, a game could be played based on true/false in which <strong>the</strong><br />

teacher moves <strong>the</strong> cards around before <strong>the</strong> students come into <strong>the</strong> classroom. The<br />

students must spot which words are in <strong>the</strong> wrong place and move <strong>the</strong>m lo <strong>the</strong> correct<br />

place.<br />

Characteristics and techniques: strips <strong>of</strong> card or paper are easy and cheap to obtain<br />

and texts can readily be written on <strong>the</strong>m with markers.<br />

Dialogue sentence cards<br />

Cards can be made <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> sentences, which have become familiar to <strong>the</strong> students in a<br />

short dialogue or in a story. These sentences can be shown as <strong>the</strong> dialogue is being<br />

spoken and <strong>the</strong>n stuck on <strong>the</strong> board or held by students. This stage <strong>of</strong> recognition<br />

reading is modest to what it <strong>of</strong>fers.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 133


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

However, it is a well-tried technique and is particularly helpful to those students who<br />

are not only <strong>learning</strong> to read a foreign <strong>language</strong> but one with a different script. Reading<br />

practice<br />

Command cards<br />

Ano<strong>the</strong>r will established use <strong>of</strong> word cards "commands" Commands are written on <strong>the</strong><br />

cards; <strong>the</strong> teacher show a card to student and <strong>the</strong> student carries out <strong>the</strong> command.<br />

The usual commands are open <strong>the</strong> door etc.<br />

However, ore amusing commands could be added to <strong>the</strong> collection. For example;<br />

Writing Practice<br />

Characteristics and techniques; <strong>the</strong> ease and sped <strong>of</strong> selecting displaying word and<br />

many combination.<br />

Class sentences<br />

Word cards allow <strong>the</strong> teacher and class to build sentences and to experiment with <strong>the</strong><br />

addition, <strong>the</strong> substitution and <strong>the</strong> subtraction <strong>of</strong> words within a sentence. The physical<br />

manipulation <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> words can contribute enormously to an understanding <strong>of</strong> sentence<br />

construction by some students. (A variety <strong>of</strong> ways <strong>of</strong> <strong>learning</strong> should be <strong>of</strong>fered to <strong>the</strong><br />

class to mach <strong>the</strong> variety <strong>of</strong> wals in witch individual student need to learn<br />

In <strong>the</strong> first example, successive students take a card, read it out to <strong>the</strong> class and <strong>the</strong>n<br />

with <strong>the</strong> help <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> class decide were <strong>the</strong>y should stand in <strong>the</strong> sentence.<br />

In <strong>the</strong> second example, <strong>the</strong> teachers ask <strong>the</strong> students to arrange <strong>the</strong> cards on <strong>the</strong><br />

[Escribir texto] Página 134


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

boars to make a sentence. Here one sentence is truck on <strong>the</strong> board and ano<strong>the</strong>r in<br />

propped on <strong>the</strong> self at <strong>the</strong> button <strong>the</strong> board.<br />

In <strong>the</strong> third example, <strong>the</strong> teacher gives a group <strong>of</strong> students a set <strong>of</strong> word cards and<br />

asks <strong>the</strong>m to stand in alphabetical order.<br />

Listening<br />

Characteristics and techniques: <strong>the</strong> cards are easy and quick to make. They can be<br />

displayed at <strong>the</strong> most appropriate moment without technical difficulty.<br />

Spot <strong>the</strong> word<br />

The teacher reads or tells a story and <strong>the</strong> individual students hold up <strong>the</strong>ir cards as<br />

<strong>the</strong>y hear <strong>the</strong>ir word spoken. This is training in intensive listening. The students are<br />

<strong>learning</strong> how to concentrate on one word or phrase and to ignore <strong>the</strong> rest. The word<br />

might be selected by <strong>the</strong> teacher to rein force a <strong>the</strong>me in <strong>the</strong> subject matter or in <strong>the</strong><br />

<strong>language</strong> being used. For example <strong>the</strong> students may have word cards representing <strong>the</strong><br />

various ways in witch narration can be.<br />

Connected; suddenly <strong>the</strong>n next a few moments later meanwhile just at that moment<br />

just before. Each student can be asked to not down how many times his or her word<br />

phrase is used. The frequency <strong>of</strong> use and <strong>the</strong> role <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> word can <strong>the</strong>n be discussed<br />

after <strong>the</strong> story.<br />

Summarizing a talk<br />

Card witch summarize key point in talk are most helpful in attracting <strong>the</strong> interest<br />

structuring <strong>the</strong> talk. They are use in drawing attention to key points, in giving variety<br />

and interest in <strong>the</strong> talk, in acting as reminders <strong>of</strong> with <strong>the</strong> talk Was about once it is over<br />

and in providing a reference for discussion.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 135


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

Teacher (or student) might find this used <strong>of</strong> word cards helpful in reminding <strong>the</strong>m <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong><br />

order <strong>of</strong> points <strong>the</strong>y have planned to make. And it also helps <strong>the</strong> listener to understand<br />

<strong>the</strong> general argument <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> talk and not to get lost<br />

The card can be hells up, pinned to s<strong>of</strong>t board, stuck to <strong>the</strong> board with adhesive plastic,<br />

or propped along <strong>the</strong> black board shelf.<br />

An example <strong>of</strong> set <strong>of</strong> key point for a talk might be:<br />

The same technique can also he used in story telling. Each key creature or object can<br />

he named no a card:<br />

Technical tips<br />

1. Although card is stiffer and more durable than paper, paper strips are quite<br />

adequate.<br />

2. Printers throw away enormous quantities <strong>of</strong> '<strong>of</strong>fcuts'. These are <strong>the</strong> strips <strong>of</strong> paper<br />

cut <strong>of</strong>f <strong>the</strong> ends <strong>of</strong> printed sheets.<br />

3. An alternative to producing individual cards is to have a number <strong>of</strong> standard length<br />

cards which are covered in a self - adhesive plastic. A water-based overhead<br />

projector pen can <strong>the</strong>n be used to write words, which can he wiped <strong>of</strong>f later once<br />

<strong>the</strong> activity is over.<br />

4. To establish a minimum height for <strong>the</strong> letters, try one out!. That is <strong>the</strong> best way.<br />

However, <strong>the</strong> general guidance is that, letters should be about 6 cm high to be<br />

seen 10 m away.<br />

5. Words composed solely <strong>of</strong> CAPITAL LETTERS are more difficult to read than those<br />

in upper and lower case letters. We recognize words partly by <strong>the</strong>ir overall shape.<br />

Words made <strong>of</strong> capital letters all look <strong>the</strong> same shape, i. e rectangular.<br />

6. Ways <strong>of</strong> displaying word cards have been referred to above. A class display<br />

sentence maker can be made as follows:<br />

A large sheet <strong>of</strong> paper is folded as shown above and <strong>the</strong>n staple onto card or<br />

hardboard.<br />

Au<strong>the</strong>ntic printed materials include anything written and printed in English:<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 136


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

newspapers, magazines, publicity, technical instructions for equipment, holiday<br />

brochures, etc.<br />

Characteristic and techniques<br />

1. Very <strong>of</strong>ten, free material is available to <strong>the</strong> teacher.<br />

2. The fact that it is au<strong>the</strong>ntic material clearly not produced for schools means that<br />

students are <strong>of</strong>ten motivated by it and curious.<br />

3. The complexity <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> is a disadvantage only if you expect <strong>the</strong> students to<br />

understand every word. It is not <strong>the</strong> difficulty <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> text, which determines which<br />

pr<strong>of</strong>iciency level <strong>of</strong> students, can use <strong>the</strong> text, hut <strong>the</strong> task you give <strong>the</strong>m to do. For<br />

example, you could give a newspaper article to a first year group <strong>of</strong> students and<br />

ask <strong>the</strong>m to find how many words <strong>the</strong>y can recognize. Thus one should be<br />

exploiting <strong>the</strong> complexity <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> material and showing students that <strong>the</strong>y can <strong>of</strong>ten<br />

make some sense even <strong>of</strong> difficult material if <strong>the</strong>y look for every possible clue. The<br />

material should not be used for testing comprehension but for <strong>teaching</strong><br />

comprehension, which means developing a positive and confident attitude to it and<br />

<strong>learning</strong> some basic techniques for dealing with a lot <strong>of</strong> <strong>language</strong>, which is difficult<br />

to understand.<br />

4. The material can usually be photocopied and <strong>the</strong>n stuck onto card for reuse.<br />

5. The material is <strong>of</strong>ten much more expensively produced than educational books<br />

available to teachers in many countries.<br />

Newspapers<br />

Characteristics and techniques: <strong>the</strong> very fact that <strong>the</strong> <strong>language</strong> <strong>of</strong> newspapers is<br />

difficult to read is one <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> reasons for using <strong>the</strong>m. Students must experience <strong>the</strong> flow<br />

<strong>of</strong> native <strong>language</strong> use and know how to do <strong>the</strong>ir best with it.<br />

The topicality <strong>of</strong> newspapers is relevant and so too is <strong>the</strong> reflection <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> culture. Here<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 137


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

are a few things you can do with most newspapers.<br />

With your beginners:<br />

1. Ask <strong>the</strong>m to list all <strong>the</strong> words <strong>the</strong>y recognize.<br />

DOZENS <strong>of</strong> pensioners have been left Out<br />

in <strong>the</strong> cold as pans to move into Luxury<br />

retirement flats have fallen through at <strong>the</strong><br />

last minute.<br />

Wimpey Homes Hoidngs Ltd.. Opened<br />

<strong>the</strong>ir recently-completed Park field Court<br />

development in Didsbury two months ago<br />

for a public viewing.<br />

2. Ask <strong>the</strong>m lo guess what each article is about ei<strong>the</strong>r broadly, for example, sport<br />

answer to you question she or more specifically, for example, <strong>the</strong> London marathon.<br />

3. Ask <strong>the</strong>m to identify <strong>the</strong> different section <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> newspaper: <strong>the</strong> main news, <strong>the</strong><br />

editorial, general features sport, business, advertisement, etc.<br />

With more advanced students:<br />

1. Prepare some questions based on different Paris <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> newspaper, which do not<br />

entail <strong>the</strong> students reading everything in <strong>the</strong> tail but only in searching for <strong>the</strong><br />

answers to your questions. (Advances students could be asked Lo prepare <strong>the</strong><br />

questions for less advanced students.) For example:<br />

• How much does <strong>the</strong> 987 Ford Granada cost and how many miles has it done?<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 138


UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE LOJA<br />

Área de la Educación el Arte y la Comunicación<br />

English Language Career<br />

• What time is Gone With <strong>the</strong> Windom <strong>the</strong> television?<br />

• Who Lost <strong>the</strong>ir cat?<br />

• What did Sarah Raphael say when her pain ting was sold to <strong>the</strong> Metropolitan<br />

Museum <strong>of</strong> Modern Art in New York?<br />

2. Give <strong>the</strong> students advertisements from a newspaper showing prices <strong>of</strong>, for<br />

example, houses, cars, TVs, etc. and advertisements for jobs showing salaries.<br />

Ask questions such as:<br />

• How much do things cost in Britain (or <strong>the</strong> country <strong>of</strong> origin <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> newspaper)?<br />

• How do <strong>the</strong>se prices relate to what people earn, judging by <strong>the</strong> advertisements for<br />

jobs?<br />

• How do <strong>the</strong>se prices and incomes relate to those ill your own country?<br />

3. Cut out several headlines and ask <strong>the</strong> students to discuss what <strong>the</strong> article might he<br />

about. This is a good way <strong>of</strong> developing predictive reading skills.<br />

4. Cut out several headlines and articles and ask <strong>the</strong> student to match <strong>the</strong>m.<br />

5. Cut ant several photographs and <strong>the</strong>ir Captions separately. Ask <strong>the</strong> student's to<br />

match <strong>the</strong>m. Ono approach lo this technique is give a photograph to a pair <strong>of</strong> students<br />

and to ask <strong>the</strong>m to note down as much as <strong>the</strong>y can surmise from a study <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> picture.<br />

They should <strong>the</strong>n write a short article or caption to go with it before being shown <strong>the</strong><br />

actual one used.<br />

6. Cut up an article into several pieces and ask <strong>the</strong> students to sequence <strong>the</strong> pieces<br />

correctly. This can be done in various ways. In one version <strong>the</strong> class is divided in to<br />

small groups and each is given one section <strong>of</strong> an article. They study it and try to make<br />

sense <strong>of</strong> it. Then <strong>the</strong> teacher asks each group to read out <strong>the</strong>ir piece <strong>of</strong> <strong>the</strong> article. The<br />

groups make notes un <strong>the</strong> o<strong>the</strong>r pieces <strong>the</strong>y hear and try to decide what order <strong>the</strong>y<br />

should be in. Next <strong>the</strong>re is a class discussion. The pieces can be read and re-read until<br />

everyone is in agreement. Finally <strong>the</strong> whole article is read out.<br />

[Escribir texto] Página 139

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!